Home

3700 Portable Sampler User Manual

1. TR Nam 4 Reg Ra7pa6 R 3 RS4 R72 PRINTER Ez yum wi uta u4s TPE u47 u4s CHE J tee rE i i A LE u cag u e INE E NE ru ug u bal ce 2 D ON ro N OUT di r r r r Li n B ya ENa a m Ha i i ne Moi o m H N H H i OUT T T u T T o m a ra cis Ge sl Ia CBA ces T r R75 ua cas lt aa l Caz Roga CR44 J b Rea a T l l 1 J Rea u l u4e 7 i ml l TPS 1 y o h x l LEZ RE7 re CS ire N a J L R74 s J Lo ja a ru m E Nee I I OUT I I 4 F R74 o TPH o d l RZE TF rg C4e P i D54 ag J L asi m uz ug r CRI si r r ne Roe CR7IREZ FER cea u 2 ua 1 u 1 l 1 i 1 1 o in oa N o N lt 1 e n re T T TOA T i OUT a z TN RH REE j Ef o A a 1 F JL om pal GE a47 V X cR4 LS a ae L 7 i l ae reg MALEREI FREE RES CRE RS9 T u44 RSS R44 Cat j R52 p Eaz a CRE CRE m m H a fl ii HELI m o D ds car C46 sd I LR o Pe r r rh nd ces 3 u uM in u a C L o T 1 1 1 He My o mA t Ta cea o 4 us z B1 m Ahh n o cea ax ute m a in m Jk R3E pyg CEB M gyo R54 CRI J L CR4S gr s r Raa cag i RSE 1 sd Lu uaa use z5 i pe baer F o R46 a4 zs 9 p Ree nae our y F
2. B 5 Interfacing Equipment 1640 Liquid Level Actuator 1640 Instruction Manuals coimeas ct he einen Sa LO Un ee Sina de BA Ga Connect cable 25 Teledyne Isco sampler to Isco Flow meter Connector only without cable for use with non Isco Flow meters with an isolated contact closure proportional to flow Same as above with 22 cable terminating in two wires 2100 Series Sampler Interface Cable 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface converts analog signal flow meter output as specified by user into pulses acceptable to Teledyne Isco samplers Flowlink Software with manual Samplink Sampler Interrogation Software with manual Interrogator communications line kit 9 pin connects laptop computer with a 9 pin serial port to sampler Interrogator communications line kit 25 pin connects laptop computer with 25 pin serial port to sampler Master Slave Interconnect Cable 10 3700 Master Slave to Flow Meter Cable Connects two 3700 Samplers as a master and slave to a flow meter
3. 60 1684 088 60 3004 130 60 1684 093 60 3004 160 60 1684 040 60 3004 106 68 3000 948 341 0118 12 60 3004 059 68 3000 965 68 3000 966 60 5314 478 60 5314 347 60 5314 399 60 3004 097 60 3004 098 60 2544 028 60 1394 023 60 1644 000 60 1644 009 60 3004 107 68 1680 060 60 1394 077 60 2004 260 60 3704 037 call factory 60 3774 013 60 2544 044 60 2544 040 60 3704 065 60 3704 080 B 3 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix B Accessories B 4 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures C 1 Practical Safety Precautions In field installations of Teledyne Isco Samplers and associated equipment the safety of the personnel involved should be the foremost consideration The following sections provide safety pro cedures for working in and around manholes and sewers the first section offers general safety advice The second section deals with the special problem of hazardous gases found in sewers WARNING The 3700 Sampler has not been approved for use in hazardous locations as defined by the National Electrical Code A CAUTION Before any sampler is installed the proper safety precautions must be taken The following discussions of safety procedures are only general guidelines Each situation in which you install a flow meter varies You must take into account the individual circumstances you are in Additional safety considerations other tha
4. HOLD DOWN 30 27 amp 33 28 OR 29 O 3703 26 Noa oll 6 R A 3 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists DRAWING NO 60 3703 261 REVISION H PAGE 3 of 4 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 052708 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIE TION 1 60 3704 029 TOP COVER ASSEMBLY 109 0601 02 DRAW CATCH KEEPER 60 3704 001 3700 SAMPLER CONTROLLER 60 3704 025 CENTER SECTION ASSEMBLY 109 0601 01 DRAW CATCH LARGE 60 2704 036 DISTRIBUTOR ARM ASSEMBLY 60 3704 109 DISTRIBUTOR ARM ASSEMBLY 12 BOTTLE 60 3704 098 DISTRIBUTOR ARM ASSEMBLY 4 BOTTLE 299 0484 06 CAP WITH TEFLON LINER 48MM POLYPROPYLENE 60 1683 132 GLASS BOTTLE 2100 2700 60 3704 032 SAMPLE BOTTLE TUB ASSEMBLY 60 2103 095 1 LITER BOTTLE POLYPROPYLENE 489 0002 00 CLAMP CABLE NYLON 3 8 X 60 3704 111 BOTTLE HOLD DOWN CORD ASSEMBLY 60 2703 011 350ML GLASS BOTTLE RETAINING RING 291 0011 01 CAP 1 QUART POLYPROPYLENE 291 0011 02 TEFLON LINER FOR 1 QUART CAP 60 3704 112 EXPANDER RING ASSEMBLY 12 BOTTLE 60 3704 108 BASE ASSEMBLY 12 BOTTLE 291 0011 03 ROUND BOTTLE 1L WITH LID POLYPROPYLENE 299 0012 19 BOTTLE 1 GAL GLASS WITH 110MM THROAT 299 0601 28 BOTTLE 1 GALLON WITH CAP POLYPROPYLENE 60 9004 351 4 1 GALLON RACK AND HOLD DOWN 31 299 0013 05 BOTTLE 4 GALLON WITH CAP NALGE
5. 4 6 Section 5 Routine Maintenance 5 1 Cleaning the Sampler 5 1 5 2 Cleaning Protocols for Priority Pollutants 5 1 5 53 Pump Tubing ss eee en ea a a na me Setar hoes gees Red oe ee de 5 8 5 3 1 Inspection of Pump Tubing 5 8 5 3 2 Removing the Pump Tubing 5 4 5 3 3 Installing a New Pump Tube 5 7 Did Suction Lines Posts ue marne eee Seas be nee a GEE a tes 5 8 5 4 1 Vinyl Suction Line sereen ea en Me mn RUE Rte eue as 5 8 5 4 2 PTFE Suction Line 5 8 5 5 Internal Desiccant 5 9 Section 6 Servicing 6 1 Controller 554425 ner MUR oe cate WS es God apna Ge anne eco tn 6 1 6 1 1 If Serious Problems Occur 6 1 6 1 2 Processor Servicing 6 1 6 1 3 Removal of the Control Box 6 2 6 1 4 Access to Electronic Components 6 3 6 1 5 Removal of the Distributor Gear Case Assembly 6 5 6 1 6 Removal of the Pump Gear Case Assembly 6 6 6 2 Precautions for Servicing CMOS Circuitry 6 7 6 3 Preliminary Electronics Troublesho
6. 3 53 3 10 Extended Programming Mode 3 56 3 10 1 Extended Mode Sample Pacing 3 57 3 10 2 Extended Mode Sample Distribution 3 57 3 10 3 Extended Mode Sample Volumes 3 58 3 10 4 Extended Mode Key Times 3 58 3 10 5 Sampling Stop Resume 3 62 3 EL Start Times s oiy AE it a cae eater SS ne hen eed 3 62 3 11 1 Events Preceding Sampling Routine 3 62 3 11 2 Nonuniform Times and Disable Signals 3 64 3 11 3 Manual Sample Key and Programmed Start Times 3 64 3 12 Stormwater Sampling 3 67 3 12 1 Storm Sampling Checklist 3 67 3 13 Programming the Sampler for a Storm Routine 3 71 3700 Portable Samplers Table of Contents 3 13 1 First Section First Bottle Group Settings 3 71 3 13 2 Second Section Second Bottle Group 3 74 3 14 Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure 3 79 3 15 Extended Programming Examples 3 80 3 16 Standby State sc cps ee EN ee neon ec Seka Se aye hah 3 97 3 16 1 Operable Keys in Standby State
7. 1 5 1 2 6 Flexible Start Times 1 5 1 2 7 Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure 1 6 Delivery System 2 Le A Sos ho heed dd ee ER RME A 1 6 1 3 1 Liquid Detector 234524242288 ihi ne ues Se nea a ele et 1 6 1 3 2 Pump Tubing and Suction Lines 1 6 DBS Strainer Se eane Hea Te Rd Ss oe ea eee SS ae Lier scsi 1 7 1 3 4 Bottle Configurations 1 7 Power Options rs cesta me ein Bhs Phe See due OH ent OR Ue EUR AS E 1 8 Compatible Equipment 1 8 1 5 1 Isco Flow Meters 55 48 mdr mans Sn ee sn nn dat den wR oe 1 8 1 5 2 Non Isco Flow Meters 1 9 1 5 3 Samplink for Sampling Data Retrieval 1 9 1 5 4 Liquid Level Actuator 1 10 1 5 5 Master Slave Cables 1 10 Technical Specifications 1 10 Section 2 Setup Procedures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 Assembly and Disassembly of the Case 2 1 Preparing the Base Section 2 1 2 2 1 Standard Base Section 2 1 2 2 2 Compact Base Section
8. When the pump begins to pump forward to deliver the sample the second line will indicate the sample delivery by displaying the word PUMPING and the sample volume being delivered The message remains during the sample delivery and post sample purge When the sampling cycle is completed the display will indicate the upcoming sample shown here This display indicates that the upcoming sample is the second of four samples the current sample bottle is bottle 1 The sample event is scheduled for 6 15 The current time is just after 6 00 The next displays illustrated here show the displays as the sample volumes are deposited in bottle 1 3 83 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling This display appears as the pump delivers the first sample to bottle 2 The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date Example Extended Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling shows how to program the sampler to take samples at intervals of 10 pulses Samples will be multiplexed 800 ml sample volumes will be placed into two bottles at each sample event Each bottle
9. 3 97 3 17 Displayed Selections and Messages 3 100 3 17 1 Additional Displays 3 101 3 17 2 Display Status 3 101 3 17 3 Reviewing or Printing Program Information 3 102 3 17 4 Source of Sample Event 3 104 3 17 5 Error Messages and Missed Samples 8 105 SAB Rum State yess 06 Le See de ee ea electra ME bak Siecle EEE RE Galen ere ne 3 106 Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment 4 1 Introduction i ccc4 oh doce ceded ok PE ame ee ee A he eee ns 4 1 4 2 Composite Sampling 4 1 4 2 1 Conversion Procedure 4 1 4 2 2 Standard Sample Bottle Tub 4 2 4 2 3 Optional Composite Tub 4 2 4 2 4 Programming and Configuring for Composite Sampling 4 3 4 8 Connections to External Devices 4 3 4 8 1 Isco Flow Meters and Flow Loggers 4 3 4 8 2 Non Isco Flow Meters 4 4 4 3 3 4 20 mA Flow Signals 4 5 4 3 4 1640 Liquid Level Actuator 4 5 4 3 5 Master Slave Connections
10. AT HH MM DD MM j HH MM FIRST SET CHANGE AT DD MM L AA Display 100 1 STOP or RESUME TIMES 1 24 j Nz Display 101 1 STOP SAMPLING AT 1 HH MM DD MM NZ Display 102 S el LING AT DD MM RESUME SAMPI 1 HH MM PROGRAMM NG SEQUENCE COMPLETE From STORM branch Figure 3 11 Extended Programming Mode Sample Volume and Key Times 3 60 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines First Bottle Group PROGRAM CONFIGURE C Configure y TIME MODE SAMPLER 2 FIRST BOTTLE GROUP i Display 15 C Program gt i MINUTE DELAY TO FIRST GROUP SAMPLE Display 12 Spey L Display 23 TIME FLOW STORM som gt TAKE TIMED PACED SAMPLING SAMPLE EVENTS 1 MAX N Display 24 SAMPLE INTERVALS OF MINUTES 1 999 Display 30 __ BOTTLES PER SAMPLE EVENT 1 MAX Display 31 __ SAMPLES PER BOTTLE 1 MAX Display 50 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF ml EACH 10 MAX Second Bottle Group AVAILABLE Ww Display 14 TIME FLOW SECOND BOTTLE GROUP Time Flow Display 17 V Display 16 __ MINUTE DELAY TO DURING AFTER SECOND GROUP SAMPLES FIRST GROUP v D
11. This display appears when you select ENABLE in step 15 For the purposes of this example set the number of retries to 0 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry This setting determines the number of times the sampler will try to detect the presence of liquid for each sample event To verify the programming mode setting press the ENTER PROGRAM key Select BASIC Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection Scroll through the remaining options with the arrow keys Use the techniques above to change or verify the settings If you want to reinitialize the configure and program settings to factory settings follow the procedures given in Steps 22 to 24 4 4 To access the displays used in this option press the ENTER PROGRAM key 3 25 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Checking the Configure Option Settings Continued 23 For the purposes of this example select NO to skip the test Press ENTER PROGRAM to accept the selection 24 If you want to reinitialize the settings select YES The entire RAM with the exception of the current pump count total bottle size settings suction line settings and sampler ID will be reinitialized to factory settings The sampler will automatically turn itself off as part of the reinitialization process Select NO if
12. 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access th 2 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM 3 Step through the program until the CALIBRATE SAMPLER input display appears Step 4 Other program sequence displays 4 Select YES 5 Before pressing the MANUAL SAMPL 7 Repeat the procedure if desired by selecting YES When you are satisfied with the calibration select NO Under normal conditions you should not need to repeat the procedure 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines each pumping cycle Then check the suction line entries in the configure sequence to see that they are accurate The calibration procedure is intended to be for fine tuning only After you enter the sample volume actually delivered as shown in Step 6 all subsequent sample volumes delivered will be adjusted to correct for the difference between the expected sample volume and the actual volume entered Clear the adjustment by changing a suction line entry in the Suction Line configure option or by reinitialization of the sampler Because the sample volume can be calibrated to 10 ml use a graduated cylinder to facilitate measurement Teledyne Isco offers a graduated cylinder and spare bottles as accessories from the factory Refer to the Appendix B Accessories List for details The calibration pump cycle will include rinse cycles and retries if the sampler is configured to perform them This en
13. a D n Q 5 F ion D oh at D EE ag n 5 ke i w an 5 er n ion D 2 CAUTION Cautions identify a potential hazard which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury This category can also warn you of unsafe practices or conditions that may cause property damage WARNING Warnings identify a potentially hazardous condition which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury N DANGER DANGER limited to the most extreme situations to identify an imminent hazard which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury lt 3700 Portable Samplers Safety Hazard Symbols Warnings and Cautions The equipment and this manual use symbols used to warn of hazards The symbols are explained below Hazard Symbols The exclamation point within the triangle is a warning sign alerting you of important instructions in the instrument s technical reference manual The lightning flash and arrowhead within the triangle is a warning sign alert ing you of dangerous voltage inside the product Pinch point These symbols warn you that your fingers or hands will be seri ously injured if you place them between the moving parts of the mechanism near these symbols Symboles de s curit Ce symbole signale l existence d instructions importantes relatives au produit dans ce manuel A A Ce symbole signale la pr sence d un danger d
14. Review Select REVIEW to review the program settings and sampling results The sampler will present the display shown below Use this display to leave the Display Status procedure or to review the program settings or sampling results Display 150 No Select NO to return to the previous operating state If you entered Display Status from standby the standby message will reappear If you entered Display Status from the run state the sampling routine will resume Settings Select SETTINGS to review the program settings Use the left arrow right arrow and the ENTER PROGRAM keys to move through the sampling settings When the right arrow or the ENTER PROGRAM key is pressed at the last settings display the REVIEW PROGRAM display will reappear Results Select RESULTS to review the results of the sam pling routine The first display reports the time and date the sampling program started Use the left and right arrows and 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines ENTER PROGRAM keys to move through the results If the routine was finished at the time you pressed the DISPLAY STATUS key the last display will report the time and date the routine ended Print Select PRINT from Display 148 to send the current status program settings or sampling results to the Teledyne Isco Field Printer The Teledyne Isco Field Printer has been discontinued and is no longer sold by Teledyne
15. Trade Name Model No Year of Issue Standards to which Conformity is Declared 2004 108 EC The EMC Directive 2012 19 EC The WEEE Directive 2006 95 EC The Low Voltage Directive Teledyne Isco 4700 Superior Lincoln Nebraska 68504 USA Mailing Address P O Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 Laboratory Equipment for Light Industrial Commercial Environments Model 3700 Sampler with 923 or 946 power source 2013 EN 61326 1 2006 EMC Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use EN 61010 1 2001 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use EN 60529 1992 amp NEMA Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosure Controller IP X7 third party NEMA 4X amp 6 self declared Standard Description EN61000 4 2 2009 Electrostatic Discharge Severity Applied Performance Criteria Level 2 4kV contact discharge A Level 3 8kV air discharge A EN61000 4 3 2006 Radiated RF Immunity 80 MHz to1GHz 10 V m 80 AM at 1kHz A A1 2000 A2 2010 1 4 GHz 2 7GHz 3 V m 80 AM at 1kHz EN61000 4 4 2004 Electrical Fast Transient EFT on A1 2010 Mains EN61000 4 5 2005 Surge on AC Lines Level 2 2kV on ac lines A 2kV common mode 1kV differential mode A EN61000 4 6 2008 Conducted RF on Mains amp I O lines 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3V rms 80 AM at 1kHz A EN61000 4 11 2004 Voltage Dips Short Interruptions 0 5 1 cycle each polarity 100 A
16. When more than one person must enter a manhole the first person should reach the bottom and step off the ladder before the next one starts down When two men climb at the same time the upper one can cause the lower one to fall by slipping or stepping on his fingers 5 Traffic Protection In addition to traffic cones markers warning signs and barricades a vehicle or a heavy piece of equipment should be placed between the working area and oncoming traffic Flashing warning signals should be used to alert drivers and pedestrians Orange safety vests should be worn by personnel stationed at the surface when the manhole is located in a vehicular traffic area 6 Falling Object All loose items should be kept away from the manhole opening This applies to hand tools as well as stones gravel and other objects 7 Removing the Covers Manhole covers should be removed with a properly designed hook Use of a pick ax screwdriver or small pry bar may result in injury A suitable tool can be made from 4 inch round or hex stock Two inches of one end should be bent at a right angle and the other end should be formed into a D handle wide enough to accommodate both hands Even with this tool care must be exercised to prevent the cover from being dropped on the toes The 2 inch projection should be inserted into one of the holes in the cover the handle grasped with both hands and the cover lifted by straightening the legs which have be
17. output for event marks both use pin D When two samplers are connected as master and slave the master slave inhibit signal replaces the bottle number output When the master slave pair connects to a flow meter with the Master Slave to Flow Meter Cable the inhibit signal will be sent to both the slave sampler and the flow meter Since this signal does not vary as it would if it were a bottle number signal the flow meter will not report a bottle number at the event mark Master Slave Cycle When installing the master slave pair you must press the START SAMPLING key on both machines to place both machines in the run state The first machine started becomes the master After the master completes its routine you can service it and start it again After servicing if you don t start the sampler again the master slave cycle will halt after the second sampler finishes its routine The sampler cannot reverse roles unless both are in the run state Continuous Master Slave Sampling vs Storm Monitoring with Master Slave Pairs You can use master slave sampling in applications where you want to sample continuously or for storm water runoff monitoring In continuous sampling applica tions service each sampler when it terminates its routine After servicing press the START SAMPLING key to start the sampler again and resume the master slave cycle The samplers can cycle continuously because each has the same role and usually iden tical sa
18. CISPR11 RF Emissions Radiated below 1 GHz Group 1 Class A Industrial Scientific and PASS EN 55011 2009 and Conducted AC Mains Medical Equipment EN61000 3 2 2006 AC Harmonics Flicker A1 2009 A2 2009 EN61000 3 3 2008 Class A quasi stationary equipment PASS We the undersigned hereby declare that the design of the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive s and Standards as of January 25 2013 USA Representative ter Pr Vikas V Padhye Ph D Vice President and General Manager Teledyne Isco 4700 Superior Street Lincoln Nebraska 68504 Phone 402 464 0231 Fax 402 464 0318 60 3703 246 RevE te ISCO _ Everywhereyoulook Teledyne Isco One Year Limited Factory Service Warranty This warranty exclusively covers Teledyne Isco instruments providing a one year limited warranty covering parts and labor Any instrument that fails during the warranty period due to faulty parts or workmanship will be repaired at the factory at no charge to the customer Teledyne Isco s exclusive liability is limited to repair or replacement of defective instruments Teledyne Isco is not liable for consequential damages Teledyne Isco will pay surface transportation charges both ways within the 48 contiguous United States if the instrument proves to be defective within 30 days of shipment Throughout the remainder of the warranty period the customer will pay to ret
19. Model 913 High Capacity Power Pack 120 volt Model 914 Battery Backed Power Pack 120 volt Model 923 High Capacity Power Pack 240 volt Model 924 Battery Backed Power Pack 240 volt Model 934 Nickel Cadmium Battery Model 946 Lead Acid Battery Model 948 45 Amp Hour Battery Portable 12 volt DC 6 Amp Battery Charger for 948 Battery Model 961 Battery Charger 120 volt Model 965 Five Station Battery Charger 120 240 V with 120 V power cord Model 965 Five Station Battery Charger 120 240 V with 240 V power cord Solar Panel Battery Charger 5 watt Solar Panel Battery Charger 40 watt Solar Panel Battery Charger 90 watt 5 watt Solar Panel Cable 25 foot Length 0 0 0 0 0 ccc cence nes Solar Panel Y Cable ses een net oor e AA eects entice ee eed eo Eee Solar Panel Interr Extension Cable Connect cable for external 12 VDC power source terminates in heavy duty battery clips
20. OFF ON number The number should fall within the range of 50 to 200 If the count falls below 50 or exceeds 200 have the pump serviced A count near 100 is typical Distributor Test Following the pump test you can test the distributor If you elect to test the distributor the sampler will move the distributor to Position 24 then return it to Position 1 The positions are indicated on the display If the message DIS TRIBUTOR JAMMED is displayed check the routing of the pump tubing and the bottles in the tub If the tubing and bottles are correctly positioned the distributor drive mechanism may need servicing Display 370 Reinitialize Controller In the final steps you reinitialize the sampler If you select NO the sampler will return to the con figure option list If you select YES the sampler will reset a number of configuration and program settings then you can turn off the sampler Display 371 Table 3 4 lists the reinitialized settings Not all settings are reset Set Clock Bottle Size Suction Line and Sampler ID con figure option settings remain unchanged This reduces the number of settings you would need to change if the sampler were accidently reinitialized The Pump Count total is not reset to maintain an accurate count for the Tubing Life Warning This option allows you to leave the configure sequence and return to the standby state There are no input displays Press the ENTER PROGRA
21. PBDE 4 iI X O O O O O Circuit Boards LT X O O O O O Display 4 Bek O O O O X O Wiring ST rh ye ARBES O O O O X O Internal Cables SE Z EERE O O O O x O Line Cord 3 Em BAL x O O O xX O DC Motor NE O O O O x O Keypad BEX O O X O O O Connectors FAP SEEMARLIEMEMR E Name and amount of Hazardous Substances or Elements in the product O RT SE SRE RATES RAR RS BEST MEMENREERAT O Represent the concentration of the hazardous substance in this component s any homogeneous pieces is lower than the ST standard limitation X RERBABRSWRSLSEZRAHR HRAAA PHASER ST EREA REER PAL TEHA AHERN ERRI X RAR AT HE DAA X Represent the concentration of the hazardous substance in this component s at least one homogeneous piece is higher than the ST standard limitation Manufacturer may give technical reasons to the X marks ys IRE HABE The Environmentally Friendly Use Period EFUP was determined through experience EP ORBEA SEH HUME AEP 207 KR 2007 F MEN SFRRRAD AA HA BATA 3 The date of Manufacture is in code within the serial number The first three numbers are the year of manufacture 207 is year 2007 followed by a letter for the month A is January B is February and so on Hazmat Table 6712 3700 60 9003 655Rev DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ISM A Application of Council Directive Manufacturer s Name Manufacturer s Address Equipment Type Environment
22. lectocution AN Risque de pincement Ces symboles vous avertit que les mains ou les doigts seront bless s s rieusement si vous les mettez entre les l ments en mouvement du m canisme pr s de ces symboles Warnungen und Vorsichtshinweise Das Ausrufezeichen in Dreieck ist ein Warnzeichen das Sie darauf aufmerksam macht da wichtige Anleitungen zu diesem Handbuch geh ren Der gepfeilte Blitz im Dreieck ist ein Warnzeichen das Sei vor gef hrlichen Spannungen im Inneren des Produkts warnt vi Vorsicht Quetschgefahr Dieses Symbol warnt vor einer unmittelbar drohen den Verletzungsgefahr f r Finger und H nde wenn diese zwischen die beweglichen Teile des gekennzeichneten Ger tes geraten 3700 Portable Samplers Table of Contents Section 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Introduction iets ct fetes ol nee M tis Mase Rake wee eS 1 1 1 1 1 3700 Standard Description 1 1 1 1 2 3700 Compact Description 1 2 Programmable Features d cete rande lpia seen eRe sr re mat 1 2 1 2 1 Flexible Sampling Intervals 1 3 1 2 2 Multiplexing cc sensata une SO Sat gta der nent es Rae La 1 3 1 2 3 STORM Sampling 1 4 1 2 4 Master Slave Sampling 1 5 1 2 5 Accurate Sample Volumes
23. m QE Display 91 Display 92 TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT START FLOW COUNT AT HH MM DD MMM HH MM DD MMM N AA STANDBY 22 Figure 3 8 Basic Programming Mode Program Sequence Structure 3 20 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 8 Basic Programming The steps for programming the sampler in basic mode follow the Procedure procedure outlined below 1 Turn on the sampler with the ON OFF key The sampler always wakes up in the standby state The STANDBY message will appear If the sampler is turned off while run ning a routine the PROGRAM HALTED message will be displayed Both messages indicate the sampler is in standby 2 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the interactive state Select program Refer to Figure 3 8 for displays noted in Steps 3 to 6 To return to a previous display when programming the sampler press the exit program key The sampler will return to standby Press the ENTER PROGRAM key again to reenter the interactive state Continue to press the ENTER PROGRAM key to scroll through the displays until you locate the display in question Enter the Sample Pacing settings The sampler will prompt you to select either time or flow pacing Depending on your selection you will then be prompted to enter the time or flow pulse interval between samples NM Note If you will be using very short sample intervals be su
24. ple to the first bottle group The delay begins after the programmed start time for the STORM routine In applications where there is a flow meter programmed to enable the sampler the delay begins after the sampler is enabled Delay to Second Group Extended A time of up to 99 minutes can be entered to delay the first sample delivered to the second bottle group when the second bottle group receives time paced samples The delay begins after the programmed start time for the STORM routine In applications where there is a flow meter programmed to enable the sampler the delay begins after the sampler is enabled 3 43 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Table 3 3 Sampling Capabilities Through the Program Sequence Continued Start Times Extended You can enter a specific start time for the STORM routine If no start time is entered the Start Time Delay will be used Maximum Flow Interval Extended You can enter maximum period of time between flow paced sam ple events If this period of time is exceeded the sampler will ter minate the routine 3 9 7 Load Stored Program The Load Stored Program option allows you to load one of as many as three sampling programs that you have previously saved with the Save Current Program configure option After loading a program the sampler will adjust the time settings to current times and dates Check the settings before starting the program to be sure th
25. s routine is normally a flow paced a routine not another STORM routine The STORM variant of master slave sampling allows you to both increase the total volume of samples collected and extend the sampling time period You can program the sampler to take sample volumes of 10 to 9 990 milliliters Equipped with the LD90 liquid presence detector the 3700s deliver accurate repeatable sample volumes in changing head conditions The LD90 is a nonwetted liquid presence detector It detects virtually any pumpable liquid and because it is nonwetted sample conductivity vis cosity temperature and composition do not affect detection Although it is not normally necessary you can calibrate samples if you wish You can program a sampling routine to use a specific start time and date or a start time delay The sampler will accept a specific start time and date up to one month beyond the current date The start time delay is the period between the time you press the start sampling key and the time the routine actually starts You can adjust it from 0 zero to 9 999 minutes Other features are available Program storage allows you to store as many as three separate programs eliminating the need to reprogram the sampler for recurrent sampling routines A program lock prevents unauthorized program alterations When the lock is enabled users must enter a password before they can change any program settings although they can view the pro gramed s
26. 1 To place the sampler in a programming mode press 2 Use lt or D to make a selection To accept the biinking solection pross ss 3 Use the numeric keys to change program values To accopt value press To return to a previous value press 4 To run the program pross act att 5 To hak sampling or stop the pump pross 6 To view program parameters pross afa Pq internal Case Hurridty se Figure 3 7 3700 Control Panel Control Keys Control keys let you turn the sampler on or off start or resume the currently entered program and control the sampler manually Control key functions are e ON OFF Pressing the ON OFF key when the sampler is off will turn the sampler on reactivate the display and place the sampler in the standby state Pressing the ON OFF key when the sampler is on will halt all sampling activity and clear the display e PUMP FORWARD PUMP REVERSE The PUMP FORWARD and PUMP REVERSE keys run the pump forward or in reverse until you interrupt it with the STOP key While the pump is running one of the messages shown below is displayed depending on the pumping direction PUMP IHG FORWARD PUMP IHG REVERSE 3 14 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines CAUTION Tests indicate that the pump produces sound levels in excess of 85db at one meter Prolonged exposure to this sound level could result in hearing loss and requires the use of protective
27. 2 1 2 2 3 Bottl s 122 sds needa eee ne ne ne nn rare Ra net ae 2 2 Cooling the Samples rsrsr eins ei RS rene due en Rate 2 2 Suction Line e erreser niri rati i e des dat odie wea druide 2 2 2 4 1 Attaching Vinyl Suction Line 2 3 2 4 2 Attaching PTFE Suction Line 2 4 2 4 3 Routing of the Suction Line 2 4 Strainers 4 sobs cals ae eee nee Ed nur lord Ap aso rames de gece tei aeaa 2 4 2 521 Intake Placement ass Le atk cap dite lee de Theat a eG 2 5 Connection to Power Source 2 5 Placement of the Sampler into Operation 2 6 2 7 1 Connection to a Flow Meter 2 7 2 7 2 Saving Program Settings 2 7 Recovering the Sampler 2 7 2 8 1 Exchanging Sampler Tubs 2 7 28 2 Restarting ca os aus ahs see re nee nina dee 4 Riga Gagged le Tee alos 2 7 Sampler Locking r 5414428 ee av re eee ee in ee ne ot Slee es 2 7 vii 3700 Portable Samplers Table of Contents viii Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 1 Description of Sampling Operation 3 2 3 1 1 Sample Events and the Sampling Cycle 3 2 3 2 Types of Samples earo seco en ee sted Di eh ERE Se h
28. Load Stored Program 3 44 Master Slave 3 48 Nonuniform Time 3 47 Portable Refrigerated 3 39 Program Lock 3 52 Programming Mode 3 42 Purge Counts 3 52 Run Diagnostics 3 52 Sampler ID 3 52 Save Current Program 3 45 Set Clock 3 38 Start Time Delay 3 47 Stop Resume 3 47 Suction Line 3 40 Tubing Life 3 52 D Data Retrieval 1 9 Delay 3 47 3 64 Desiccant 5 9 Diagnostics 3 52 Disassembly 2 1 Display Index D 1 Displays 3 16 3 100 D 1 Run State 3 106 Settings and Results 3 101 E Error Messages 3 105 Extended Programming 3 6 3 56 Examples 3 80 Key Times 3 58 Multi Bottle Composite 3 7 Multiplexing 3 6 Nonuniform Time 3 6 Sample Distribution 3 57 Sample Pacing 3 57 Stops and Resumes 3 7 3 62 External Devices 4 3 F Factory Settings Configure Option 3 54 Program 3 55 Flow Meters 1 8 4 3 Enable Pin 3 48 Event Mark 3 50 Non Teledyne Isco 4 4 Flow Mode Calculation E 1 G Glossary F 1 I Installation 2 6 Index 1 3700 Portable Samplers Index Index 2 K Keypad 3 13 L Language 1 6 3 79 Liquid Detector 1 6 3 41 Liquid Level Actuator 1 10 4 5 Locking the Sampler 2 7 Password 3 52 M Master Slave Cables 1 10 Material Safety Data Sheets G 1 Metric Units 1 6 3 79 MSDS G 1 P Parts A 1 Password 3 52 Power 1 8 2 5 Programming 3 8 3 12 Basic 3 21 Examples 3 23 Extended Mode 3 56 Modes 3 9 3 11 Operating States 3 8 Sa
29. SHEET 6 OF 10 REV R DATE 0811 a PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 26 602703037 PUMP SHAFT SPACER PLATE l 602703050 PUMP PLATE 28 602703058 SPACER 380 ID X 1 00 OD X 060 LONG DELRIN 29 602703096 STANDOFF 6 32 X 25 SQUARE X 75 LONG AL 30 602704010 PUMP SHAFT ASSEMBLY 3 602703076 FLANGED BEARING 275 ID X 625 OD X 31 LONG 32 603704160 OTOR PLATE ASSEMBLY CE 33 602703063 PUMP SHAFT OPTICAL DISK 34 603704172 PUMP MOTOR WITH FILTER ASSEMBLY 39 602704039 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY COUNTER 36 602104048 OUNTING PLATE ASSEMBLY OPTICAL COUNTER 31 40202580 TRANSISTOR 2N5881 2N5882 a 501311209 BEARING BRONZE FLANGED 1891D 314 W 3 64 THICK 375 FLANGE BOSTON GEAR FB35 39 602104008 PUMP GEAR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 40 e371 19000 i une Cn ee IRIDITE 8 233010804 WSHR FLAT 171 ID X 625 OD X 060 82 603703291 SPACER PUMP GEAR CASE ASSEMBLY NOTE l For current prices and quotations on parts contact Isco Service Department 2 This list is subject to change without notice 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists DRAWING NO 603703268 SHEET 7 OF 10 A 14 3700 Portable Sa
30. Storm Sampling 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state Display 1 3 Select STORM Display 12 After displaying this message briefly the sampler will automatically advance to the next display of values 0 to 999 Display 15 Display 23 Display 24 7 Enter the number of bottles per sample event 3 Display 30 8 Enter 1 to place one sample in each bottle Display 31 9 Enter the sample volume of 900 ml Display 50 The sampler will display this message before automatically advancing to the next display 10 Select FLOW Display 14 11 Select DURING to fill the second bottle group at the same time as the first bottle group Display 16 12 Enter 5 as the flow pulse interval The sampler will take a sample every fifth flow pulse Display 22 13 This display requires two entries Enter 2 hours and 0 to set the maximum amount of time between flow paced sample events 3 95 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 14 15 16 17 18 After displaying this message the sampl Example Storm Sampling Continued Enter the number of bottles filled at each sample event 1 Enter 2 to set the number of samples delivered to each bottle Enter the sample volu
31. The next display will prompt you to select either BOTTLES PER SAMPLE or SAM 3 21 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 22 PLES PER BOTTLE Bottles per sample multiplexing is useful if you require a sample volume greater than the capacity of a single bottle or where various types of preservatives must be added to the samples Samples per bottle multiplexing is useful when you want to collect a series of small composite sam ples For example you can collect four samples at 15 min ute intervals in each bottle resulting in a series of hourly composite samples Section 3 2 discusses the types of mul tiplexing Enter the Sample Volume settings Depending on the selec tions you make in the configure sequence it may contain prompts for the suction head and sampler calibration When entering the sample volume keep in mind the 10 ml sample volume repeatability Because the entered vol ume is a nominal value it is prudent to calculate a total sample volume that is somewhat less than the volumetric capacity of the bottle as a safety factor This will minimize the effects of cumulative error Refer to Section 3 9 2 for notes on cumulative error and bottle size If you are using bottles per sample multiplexing to add preservatives to consecutive samples be sure to consider the volume of the preservative into account Suction Head You can configure the sampler through the Liquid Detector
32. clock time you will be able to enter a specific time and date for each sample event when entering settings in the program sequence If you select MINUTES you will be able to enter nonuniform intervals in minutes Nonuniform times are not available in a STORM sam pling routine Display 280 The Calibrate Sampler option adds or removes the calibration settings to the program sequence If you select ENABLE the calibration displays will be added to the program sequence and you will be able to precisely calibrate the sample volumes Display 290 The Sampling Stop Resume configure option lets you add stop and resume settings Display s 100 101 and 102 to the program sequence The Stop Resume settings appear in the key time section of the program sequence You can enter as many as 24 times 12 stop times and 12 resume times For example the Stop Resume option allows you to define a sampling routine which will take samples at intervals of 15 minutes between 6 a m to 8 a m and between 4 p m to 6 p m Sampling Stops and Resumes are not available in a storm routine If you are using a time switched sampling routine that includes the use of stops and resumes the sampler will reset the time switch interval at each resume time If a routine with time switches every hour is programmed for stop and resume times the first time switch would occur an hour after the resume time Switches would repeat every hour until a s
33. e 9400 ml 2 5 gallon polyethylene composite bottle with unlined cap requires locating insert for 24 bottle standard base section e 15 000 ml 4 gallon polyethylene composite bottle with unlined cap With the 3700 Compact the removable inner sleeve holds any of five different bottle configurations They are 24 Bottle Configuration e 500 ml polyethylene bottles with polyethylene foam lined caps 12 Bottle Configurations e 300 ml glass bottles with PTFE lined caps e 300 ml polypropylene bottles with polyethylene foam lined caps Single Bottle Composite Configurations e 9400 liter 2 5 gallon glass composite bottle with unlined cap 1 7 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction 1 4 Power Options 1 5 Compatible Equipment 1 5 1 Isco Flow Meters e 9400 liter 2 5 gallon polyethylene composite bottle with unlined cap The sampler is powered by a 12 VDC power source either a rechargeable nickel cadmium battery a lead acid rechargeable battery or an AC powered 12 VDC regulated supply CAUTION If you use a 120 or 240 volt AC connected Power Pack the AC line cord is the Disconnect Device Always install the sampler with the line cord and plug visible and readily accessible so that power can be disconnected easily For complete information on power options and their mainte nance consult the Teledyne Isco Power Products Guide which was also shipped with your sampler You can order additional copi
34. ear plugs e When you press the STOP key the sampler will display a message similar to the one shown below This message indicates the total number of pump counts that occurred while the pump was running This information can be used to set the desired number of purge counts required to purge the suction line See the Purge Counts configure option Press any key except STOP and ON OFF to return to the standby display e STOP The STOP key will stop the pump any time it is running When you press the STOP key in the run state the sampling routine will halt the sampler will transfer to the standby state and the PROGRAM HALTED message will be displayed Pressing the STOP key while in the interactive state will access the display s reference number START SAMPLING When in the standby state pressing the START SAMPLING key will begin the sampling program When entering a sampler ID this key will type a space RESUME SAMPLING When PROGRAM HALTED is displayed pressing the RESUME SAMPLING key will cause the sampler to continue with the current sample program at the point where it was halted When entering a sampler ID this key will type a period e MANUAL SAMPLE Pressing the MANUAL SAMPLE key will allow you to take a manual sample The MANUAL SAMPLE key is valid in the standby state the run state and when calibrating the sampler If you press the MANUAL SAMPLE key while a sampling program is in progr
35. to start the program from the beginning Select RESUME to resume the program at the point at which it halted If you do not make a selection from this display within 60 seconds the sampler will automatically select the currently blinking response START will reinitialize the display status memory There are three additional displays used in the run state Done The sampler will inform you it has completed a program by displaying the message illustrated below This message is dis played until you press any key at which time the display will return to the standby message Problem Occurred You will be informed that a problem was encountered during the sampling routine with the message illus trated below This display will alternate with the DONE display at approximately 3 second intervals until you press any key Float Weight Tripped 3700 Samplers set up for composite sample use the display below to notify you that the program fin ished because the liquid level float float cage was tripped This display alternates with the DONE display at approximately 3 second intervals You can access a summary of the current program settings and the results of the most recent sampling routine with the DISPLAY STATUS key This key is valid in both the run and standby states The summary of the program settings consists of a number of informational displays describing the settings The results of the sampling program i
36. 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature Range 0 to 140 F 20 to 60 C Ingress Protection Control Box Third party tested for IPX amp per IEC60529 Self Certified NEMA 4X and 6 Submersible watertight dust tight and corrosion resistant Sampler Base Capacity 1 Sequential Base 24 350 ml glass or 1000 ml polypropylene bottles or 1 2 5 gallon 9500 ml glass or polyethylene container 2 Optional Composite Base 1 4 gallon 15 000 ml polyethylene container Base Insulation Standard thermal resistance factor of R 11 Compact 3700 Physical Specifications Physical Size Height 27 6 in 70 1 cm Diameter 17 75 in 44 4 cm Weight Range 32 Ibs 14 5 kg empty to 62 Ibs 28 2 kg with 24 bottles Operational Temperature Range 32 to 120 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature Range 0 to 140 F 20 to 60 C Ingress Protection Control Box Third party tested for IPX amp per IEC60529 Self Certified NEMA 4X and 6 Submersible watertight dust tight and corrosion resistant Inner Sleeve Bottle Options 1 Sequential Sampling 24 500 ml polypropylene bottles 12 300 ml glass bot tles 12 300 ml polypropylene bottles 2 Optional Composite Sampling 2 5 gallon glass composite bottle 2 5 gallon polyethylene composite bottle Base Insulation Standard thermal resistance factor of R 11 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction T
37. 3 2 Types of Samples 3 2 e The Run State section discusses what is occurring when your 3700 is operating in the run state This information introduces the types of sampling performed by the 3700 and the terminology that describes those capabilities A sample event is the complete cycle involved in taking a sample Although the cycle varies according to the program settings that define the sampling routine the cycle described here follows the typical sequence The information presented here is intended to provide you with a frame of reference for the remainder of this section 1 A sample event occurs when either the programmed inter val has expired or programmed flow volume has passed through the stream The 3700 takes a time paced sample when an internal clock reaches the time selected for the sample For flow paced samples the 3700 takes a sample after receiving a specific of flow pulses from the flow meter Each flow pulse counts for a specific flow volume as mea sured by the flow meter 2 When the time interval expires or pulse count reaches a user programmed flow volume the distributor moves to the bottle that will receive the sample 3 For the pre sample purge the pump rotates in reverse The pre sample purge is an air purge of the suction line and inlet that clears the line of any accumulated debris It also purges residual liquid to avoid cross contamination of sam ples 4 The pump direction changes moving forwar
38. 3 38 3 9 1 Set Clock ss eves agtu a ee ese Mew ey Sah Resins pete ee eat 3 38 8 9 2 Bottles and Sizes 21888 3 eae ete trim te ree RETR aA a ORT ee 3 38 3 9 3 Portable or Refrigerated Sampler 3 39 39 4 Suction Linen sue ee ee tees OS ak Gideon etant Wad ect 3 40 3 9 5 Liquid Detector 22 cise c6 ci ed beheld h eee mens anna manne 3 41 3 9 6 Programming Mode 3 42 3 9 7 Load Stored Program 3 44 3 9 8 Save Current Program 3 45 3 9 9 Flow Mode Sampling 3 46 3 9 10 Nonuniform Time 3 47 3 9 11 Calibrate Sampler 3 47 3 9 12 Sampling Stop Resume 3 47 3 9 13 Start Time Delay rosers Sateen ee Del eee Pe le ee st 3 47 3 9 14 Enable Pin 0 cece cece nee ence ne neeee 3 48 3 9 15 Event Mark 23442204 naia Medd Oba ee de me a etes als ne teas 3 50 3 9 16 Purge Counts s oeras ec iesst ae hat eur ae need 3 52 3 9 17 Tubing Lifes rris unes sis ei sn tee ME aes 3 52 3 9 18 Program Lock 3 52 3 9 19 Sampler TD 344 us cs eps an ae eek Sees ORE Medina de eae h 3 52 3 9 20 Run Diagnostics 3 52 3 9 21 Exit Configuration
39. ACGIH OTHER LIMITS Hazardous Components 1 or greater Carcinogens 0 1 or PEL TLV RECOMMENDE greater D Silica Gel SiO2 98 0 6mg m 10mg m total dust total dust Cobalt Chloride gt 2 0 0 05mg m 05mg m TWA cobalt Cobalt TWA metal dust amp fume Non Hazardous Ingredients TOTAL Section 2 Physical Chemical Characteristics Boiling N A Specific Gravity 2 1 Point H20 1 Vapor Pressure N A Melting N A mm Hg and Temperature Point Vapor N A Evaporation Rate N A Density 1 Air 1 Solubility Insoluble but will adsorb moisture Water Not reactive but will adsorb moisture in Water Reactive Appearance Purple crystals no odor and Odor Section 3 Fire and Explosion Hazard Data Flash Point and N A Auto Ignition N A Flammability Limits in N A LEL UEL Methods Used Temperature Air by Volume Extinguisher Dry chemical carbon dioxide and foam can be used Media Special Fire Water will generate heat due to the silica gel which will adsorb water and liberate heat Fighting Procedures Unusual Fire and When exposed to water the silica gel can get hot enough to reach the boiling point of water Flooding with Explosion Hazards water will reduce the temperature to safe limits Section 4 Reactivity Hazard Data STABILITY Conditions Moisture and high humidity environments Stable To Avoid lUnstable Incompatibility Water Materials to Avoid Hazardous
40. Accessories can be purchased by contacting Teledyne Isco s Cus tomer Service Department Teledyne Isco Inc Customer Service Department P O Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 USA Phone 800 228 4373 402 464 0231 FAX 402 465 3022 E mail IscoInfo teledyne com B 1 General Accessories Extra Silastic pump tubing 42 length 24 bottle and 12 bottle base 60 3704 026 Extra Silastic pump tubing 39 5 length 4 bottle base 60 3714 019 Carrying cover for extra base sequential bottles only 60 3704 036 Snap on suspension harness 60 1394 014 Sampler locking assembly 68 6700 111 Model 3700 Sampler controller with pump tubing 68 3700 004 Extra 24 bottle base with 24 polypropylene bottles 1000 ml with caps 60 3704 033 Extra 24 bottle base with 24 glass bottles 350 ml with caps 60 3704 031 Extra 12 bottle base with 12 one quart bottles with caps amp liners 68 3700 019 Extra 12 bottle base with 12 one liter round polypropylene bottles with caps 68 3700 029 12 bottle conversion kit polypropylene 68 3700 028 12 bottle conversion kit glass 68 3700 018 Plasti
41. Configure Option Display Number Factory Setting pump counts 352 Not reset PROGRAM LOCK 360 DISABLE SAMPLER ID 365 Not reset RUN DIAGNOSTICS Table 3 5 Factory Program Settings Program Setting Display Number Factory Setting 10 TIME 11 UNIFORM 12 TIME 14 FLOW 15 0 MINUTES 16 DURING 17 30 21 1 HOUR 0 MINUTES 22 10 23 1 24 60 25 10 27 1 AT 60 MINUTES 30 1 31 1 35 NO 36 SAMPLES PER BOTTLE 3 55 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Table 3 5 Factory Program Settings Continued Program Setting Display Number Factory Setting 40 COUNT 41 COUNT 42 2 HOURS 0 MINUTES 43 2 HOURS 0 MINUTES 44 1 45 1 48 NO 50 200 60 10 70 10 90 NO 93 95 NO 100 0 110 2 HOURS 0 MINUTES 3 10 Extended 3 56 Programming Mode All sampling capabilities available in the basic programming mode are available in the extended programming mode A listing of the capabilities is in Table 3 3 The extended pro gramming mode provides several additional capabilities Non uniform Time Pacing an additional multiplexing scheme multiple bottle compositing Sampling Stops and Resumes program storage and Flow Mode Sampling controls The procedure for programming the sampler in the extended mode is the same as that used to program the sampler in the b
42. Diagnostics configure option Select YES to reinitialize reset the controller the entire RAM with the excep tion of the configure option settings for current pump count total number of bottles bottle size suction line length and sampler ID will be reset to factory settings Select NO the leave the settings unchanged Display 371 Fe F D 10 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix E Calculating Flow Increment Between Samples The 3700 Sampler will accept flow proportional inputs from an external flow meter or flow logger These electronic flow input signals are transmitted to the sampler at fixed increments of total flow for example every 10 000 gallons Each time 10 000 gallons of liquid flows past the flow meter it sends a signal to the sampler which registers it as a single flow pulse You can program the sampler to totalize any number of flow pulses from 1 to 9 999 before initiating a sampling event For example if the sampler were programmed to totalize 5 flow pulses and each flow pulse represented 10 000 gallons of total flow a sample would be collected each time 50 000 gallons 5 flow pulses of 10 000 gallons each had passed the flow meter Time Interval Known If the desired average time interval between individual samples is known the flow increment between samples can be determined by calculating how much flow based on the average flow rate occur
43. Display 150 Display 151 Display 152 identifies sampling results displays that appear when you select RESULTS in Display 150 Display 152 P a Display 200 is used to identify the displays which locate each configure option in the configure sequence Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the input displays for each option Use the LEFT ARROW and the RIGHT ARROW keys to move through the options Display 200 ei name of CC figure aption Set Clock configure option Enter the time and date to set the controller s clock Use military time Enter two digits each for the day DD month MM and year YY Display 210 D 6 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued Bottles and Sizes configure option Select PORTABLE when you are using a 3700 Compact or Standard Sampler Select REFRIG only if you have a refrigerated base unit Display 220 Bottles and Sizes configure option This display appears when you select PORTABLE in Display 220 Select the number of bottles in the bottle base Display 221 Bottles and Sizes configure option This display appears when you select REFRIG in Display 220 Select the num ber of bottles in the base Display 222 Bottles and Sizes configure option Enter the bottle volume in milliliters Display 223 Bottles an
44. The message remains through the post sample purge When the sampling cycle is completed the display again indicates the upcoming sample The next displays shown here in Steps 78 through 20 show the displays as the sample volumes are deposited in Bottle 1 3 30 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling When the final sample has been deposited in the first bottle the display changes to indicate the new sample bottle This display indicates that the upcoming sample event will place the first of four sample volumes in Bottle 2 at 7 00 This display appears as the pump begins The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done 4 When the routine is complete this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date Example Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling demonstrates the steps needed to program the sampler for a flow paced routine that will place a sample in two bottles at each sample event Sample volumes of 500 ml are to be placed in the bottle sets at intervals of 10 flow pulses The routine is to start at 5 00 a m the following morning 3 31 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programmi
45. Time is the period between the time you press start sampling and the start time for the routine Figure 3 13 diagrams the sequence of events pre ceding the start time 3 62 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines START SAMPLING START TIME Delay to Start Time Determined by start time entry or start time delay Sampling Routine Figure 3 13 Simplified Start Time Diagram The start time for a routine is either the programmed start time or the time at which the delay to start time expires The pro grammed start time is determined by entries made in Displays 90 91 92 and 93 The delay to start time is determined by the entry in Display 310 of the Start Time Delay configure option These input displays are shown in Table 3 6 and in the charts in Figures 3 8 3 10 3 11 and 3 12 NOTE Unless the sampling routine contains a programmed start time Displays 91 92 or 93 the sampler will delay the start time according to the amount of time specified in the Start Time Delay configure option A programmed start time entry always overrides any settings made in the Start Time Delay con figure option Teledyne Isco 4200 Series Flow Meters and 4100 Series Flow Loggers provide two essential functions for certain sampling applications They send flow pacing signals flow pulses to the sampler for flow paced sampling The second function pro vides disable inhibit or enabl
46. Use the numeric keys to change program values To accept a value press To return to a previous value press 4 To run the program pross 5 To hak sampling or stop the pump pross 6 To view program parametors POSS ns internal Case Hurridty ef Humidity Indicator Figure 5 4 Location of 10 Screws on Control Box Lid 5 10 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance Grounding Strap Desiccant Bags 3 Figure 5 5 Internal Desiccant controller lid removed 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance 5 12 3700 Portable Samplers Sean Section 6 Servicing 6 1 Controller 6 1 1 If Serious Problems Occur 6 1 2 Processor Servicing This section presents servicing information for the 3700 Portable Samplers in the following sections e Servicing the controller e Control box removal e Removal of the distributor and pump gear cases e General care of CMOS circuitry e Circuit description of the electronic circuitry e Sample event cycle Included is an illustrated Replacement Parts List and a list of available accessories available for the 3700 Sampler For infor mation on servicing and replacing power sources consult the Teledyne Isco Power Products Guide shipped with this manual The electronic circuitry of the 3700 Sampler is solid state and its reliability is high If the unit should fail to operate properly items such as a broken or intermittent connection in
47. _ One Botttle Per Sample Event V Display 31 12 or less Bottles Per Sample Event SAMPLES PER Display 41 Display 40 BOTTLE 1 MAX CHANGE SETS BASED CHANGE BOTTLES BASED ON TIME SAMPLES BTL ON TIME SAMPLES Time Count Time Count VY Display 43 A Display 45 NV Display 42 Display 44 CHANGE SETS AFTER CHANGE SETS AFTER CHANGE BOTTLES AFTER CHANGE BOTTLES AFTER HOURS MINUTES SAMPLES HOURS MINUTES SAMPLES NZ J Other 2 Bottles Display 48 SAMPLE CONTINUOUSLY YES NO Ne N N7 Figure 3 10 Programming Mode Sample Pacing and Distribution 3 59 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Continued from Figure 3 10 Sample Volume Key Times Display 50 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF ml EACH 1 MAX Nz _Display 70 I SUCTION HEAD OF FEET 1 MAX Display 80 E SAMPLE YES NO CALIBRAT VOLUME Display 90 ENTER START TIME wo No YES NO Display 91 Display 92 TAKE FIRST SAMPLI HH MM DD MM START FLOW COUNT AT EAT HH MM DD MM NZ Yes Change Bottles Sets Based on Time ENTERFIRSTSWITCH TIME YES NO N7 L Change Bottles Sets Based on Samples gt __ Display 95 C More Than One Boti tle Per Sample Nv One Bottle Per Sample Display 46 1 Display 47 FIRST BOTTLE CHANGE
48. accept the entry If you select YES in response to this question you can select bottles per sample or samples per bottle multiplexing for your routine 7 Enter the sample volume 250 Press ENTER PROGRAM to accept the entry 3 26 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Sequential Sampling Continued 8 Because this sampling routine does not require a specific start time use the arrow keys to select NO Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry If you select YES you can enter a specific start time and date for the routine After this message displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state 9 After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 10 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number This display appears as the sampler counts down the time remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the left and the current time on the right When the start time arrives the sampler will take the first sample The sample event cycle begins with a pre sample purge During
49. an example of sampler cleaning procedures for priority pollutants Proper Cleaning The proper cleaning of equipment used in the sampling of water and wastewater is essential to ensuring valid results from laboratory analysis Cleaning protocols should be developed for all sampling equipment early in the design of the wastewater characterization program The laboratory analyst should be consulted both to ensure that the procedures 5 1 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance 5 2 and techniques are adequate as well as to avoid including prac tices that are not warranted in view of the analysis to be per formed Cleaning Examples As an example Lair 1974 has set down the standard operating procedures for the cleaning of sample bottles and field procedures equipment used by USEPA Region IV Surveillance and Analysis field personnel engaged in NPDES compliance monitoring They are reproduced below for a typical automatic sampler and related sampling equipment Teledyne Isco Glass Sample Bottles 1 One spectro grade acetone rinse 2 Dishwasher cycle wash and tap water rinse no detergent 3 Acid wash with at least 20 hydrochloric acid 4 Dishwasher cycle tap and distilled water rinse cycles no detergent 5 Replace in covered Teledyne Isco bases Suction Line 1 4 or 8 Vinyl 1 Do not reuse sample tubing No cleaning required Use new sample tubing for each new sampling setup 2 Use PTFE t
50. and flow paced sequential samples Multiplexing places more than one sample in a bottle at different sample events or places a sample in several bottles at the same sample event There are two types of multiplexing samples per bottle and bottles per sample Samples per Bottle Multiplexing In samples per bottle multiplexing the 3700 deposits a number of individual samples in the same bottle Samples per bottle multiplexing is useful when you need to collect a series of small composite samples In samples per bottle multiplexing users can modify the normal sampling cycle relocate distributor pre sample purge sample delivery post sample purge by altering the number of times the distributor is relocated Because a bottle will receive more than one sample from more than one sample event the distributor does not relocate to a new bottle at each sample event At the first sample event the dis tributor relocates if necessary to the appropriate bottle The normal sampling cycle is completed At the next sample event the distributor does not relocate and a second sample is deposited into the same bottle Compositing multiple samples continues up to the programmed number of samples After the last sample is deposited in the bottle the sampler pauses until another sample event occurs the distributor then rotates to the new bottle position and multiple samples are deposited into the new bottle Figure 3 2 illustrates samples per bottle m
51. and the first sample delivered to the first bottle group The sampler may be enabled at the start time The acceptable range of values for the delay to first group sample is 0 to 999 minutes If the delay is 0 the sampler will take the first sample when enabled by the flow meter Subsequent time paced samples will occur at the time interval entered in Display 23 3 73 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 13 2 Second Section 3 74 Second Bottle Group How to allocate bottles to the bottle groups Use the next three displays to determine the both the sample distribution and the number of bottles allocated to the bottle groups Display 23 Display 30 Display 31 A bottle group can contain one or more bottles You can allocate all bottles but one to the first bottle group The STORM routine will automatically allocate the remaining bottles or bottle to the second bottle group It obtains the total number of bottles from the bottle number setting in the bottles and sizes configure option Refer to the displays above a 24 bottle sampler pro grammed to distribute samples to three bottles at two sample events would allocate six bottles to the first bottle group The remaining 18 bottles to the second bottle group Sample distribution and sample volumes for the first and second bottle groups STORM sampling supports sequential sampling as well as all three types of multiplexing bottles pe
52. box mounted on the center section The center section includes the control box liquid detector pump and distri bution system 1 1 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction 1 1 2 3700 Compact Description 1 2 Programmable Features A desiccator is installed in the control box to prevent moisture damage to the electronics pump and distributor systems The sample base holds the sequential or composite bottles and is fully insulated allowing you to ice down samples to maintain sample integrity A watertight control box mounted on the top of the center section houses the controller The controller consists of a microprocessor with software embedded in a PROM Programmable Read Only Memory and supporting electronics The controller runs the pump moves the distributor responds to the keypad and presents information on the display The controller provides for manual control of the sampler for example you can run the pump forward with the pump forward key or initiate a manual sample with the manual sample key It governs all automatic sampling according to user selectable program settings N CAUTION Tests indicate that the pump produces sound levels in excess of 85db at one meter Prolonged exposure to this sound level could result in hearing loss and requires the use of protective ear plugs The control panel which has a 40 character alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display LCD and keypad is located on the top of th
53. by comparing the bottle volume to the product of the sample volume and the number of samples If the product exceeds the bottle volume the sampler will not pump a sample for that sample event and will record the Probable Overflow message Float Weight Tripped 3700 Samplers that are set up for single bottle compositing detect overflow with a liquid level float located at the mouth of the composite bottle If the liquid level of the bottle raises the float past the trip point the sampler will interrupt the sample event and record the Float Weight Tripped condition No More Liquid The sampler was unable to take the sample because in attempting to take the sample the sampler pumped all liquid from the flow stream No Liquid Detected The sampler was unable to take the sample because no liquid was detected Sampler Shut Off The sampler was unable to take the sample because it was halted with the on orr key during the sample event A sampler in the run state is executing the sampler s instructions according to the settings you ve entered in the program and con figure sequences To start a sampling program and place the sampler into the run state press the start sampling key While running the sampling program the sampler will present several displays that allow you to monitor the sampler s progress The displays are listed with a brief explanation in Examples Run State Displays Time Paced Sampling Run
54. components that do not come in marked protective pack aging do not use them They may already be destroyed Once assembled and soldered printed circuit boards are easily damaged by improper repair procedures Do not attempt to remove components particularly ICs from printed circuit boards unless you are skilled at this proce dure You can locate and change a defective component and the unit may still not work if excessive heat or pres sure has broken the foil traces or pulled the cores from holes on the board If trouble symptoms persist and you are unable to locate the cause call the Technical Service Department at 866 298 6174 Teledyne Isco suggests checking the following possible problem areas before attempting to service the microprocessor CPU and associated circuitry 1 2 Be sure that the supply voltage is correct Check to see that the wiring harnesses connectors and solder joints are in good condition Look for signs of physical damage such as burned or bro ken components overly hot components or evidence of water damage Check for shorted or open diodes and transistors espe cially driver transistors Ensure that voltage regulators working properly 6 3 1 Circuit Boards 6 3 2 Main Board 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing 6 Check to see if there is excessive current draw in some or all of the circuitry 7 Be sure that correct input signals are sent to the unit 8 Check
55. detector the sampler can accurately determine the operating suction head It does not have to rely on a pro grammed suction head value but can instead begin its volume delivery count when it detects liquid This minimizes inaccu racies that can occur in changing head conditions or when it is difficult to measure the suction head accurately The disable option is provided should the detector or its asso ciated circuitry become suspect If you disable the detector the manual suction head setting Display 70 is automatically added to the Sample Volume program section in the program sequence If the detector is disabled the sampler uses a calcu lated number of pump counts based on the suction head entry to deliver the correct sample volume With the detector disabled the sampler operates at diminished accuracy Display 240 Rinse Cycles The Rinse Cycle setting is available only when the detector is enabled It sets the number of suction line rinses from 0 to 3 Rinses are used to condition the suction line to reduce cross contamination During a rinse cycle the pump draws liquid up through the line until the liquid detector senses it At that point the pump reverses to purge the line This cycle repeats according to the number of rinse cycles entered Display 241 Rinse cycles contribute to the wear on pump tubing therefore if you use rinse cycles you may need to replace the tubing more frequently The Tubing Life configure optio
56. following bottle set Figure 3 3 illustrates bottles per sample multiplexing Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ZA SSS SSS 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Sample Event Number Figure 3 3 Bottles Per Sample Multiplexing 3 5 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 3 Types of Sampling The extended programming mode expands the variations of Available in Extended sample pacing and distribution The extended features listed Programming Mode below are used in more complex sampling routines Note however that the sampling capabilities described in Section 3 2 are available in both the basic and the extended programming modes Note also that STORM programming is available only in the extended programming mode 3 3 1 Nonuniform Time In the extended programming mode the 3700 Sampler can pace Intervals samples at nonuniform time intervals With nonuniform time intervals the 3700 takes samples at irregular intervals rather than at equal intervals Nonuniform time intervals are typically used in runoff studies often in conjunction with an Isco 1640 Liquid Level Actuator Nonuniform time intervals let you collect a number of samples at short intervals after a rainfall or other event occurs and collect remaining samples at widening intervals For example when you use the sampler with the actuator in a runoff study the actuator turns on the sampler when
57. for the first bottle or bottle set switch Select NO if you want to begin the switch interval at the routine s start time Display 95 This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 300 Enter the number of stop and resume times Display 100 This display appears when the setting in Display 100 is greater than zero Enter the appropriate stop time Display 101 This display appears when the setting in Display 100 is greater than one It follows Display 101 Enter the appropri ate resume time Display 102 D 5 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued This display follows Display 22 Enter the maximum amount of time you want between flow paced sample events in a storm program If the time between flow pulses exceeds this entry the sampler will terminate the routine Display 110 This display appears when a routine is halted and you press the start sampling key Select START to start the sam pling program at the beginning RESUME to continue the sampling program at the point at which it was halted Display 140 E This display appears when you have started a routine after the programmed start time Select YES to enter a new start time Select NO to start the routine immedieately some sample events may be missed or late Display 142 This display appears
58. from the flow meter is known The number of flow pulses is calculated by dividing the flow increment between samples by the volume of each flow pulse Using the first example above the flow increment between samples was calculated as 52 000 gallons assume that each flow pulse represents 10 000 gallons of flow The number of flow pulses to be programmed into the sampler is calculated 52 000 GAL 10 000 GAL FLOW PULSE 5 2 FLOW PULSES Rounding this to an even number results in 5 flow pulses to be programmed into the sampler This in turn results in a flow increment between samples of 50 000 gallons 5 flow pulses x 10 000 gallons flow pulse Total Number Of Samples To calculate the total number of samples to be collected three quantities must be known the average flow rate the flow increment between samples calcu lated above and the total time over which the composite sample is to be collected The total number of samples to be collected is determined by first calculating the total flow volume over the sampling period and then dividing this by the flow increment between samples For example assume that the average flow is 2 5 MGD the flow increment between samples is 50 000 gallons and the composite sample is to be collected over a 24 hour period The total flow volume over a 24 hour period is 2 5 MGD 2 500 000 GAL DAY 2 500 000 GAL DAY X 1 DAY 2 500 000 GAL The total number of samples to be collected in this 24 hour p
59. hours at 0 02 almost any kind Carbon CCly Heavy ethereal 5 3 Intestinal 1 000 100 At bottom Industrial Detectable Tetra Chl odor upset loss of to wastes odor oride consciousness 1 500 solvent at low concen possible renal cleaning trations damage respi ratory failure Chlorine Cl Irritant Yel 2 49 Irritates respi 4 1 At bottom Chlorine Detectable low green color ratory tract cylinder odor at low Choking odor Kills most ani and feed concentra detectable in very mals in a very line leaks tions low concentra short time at tions Non flam 0 1 mable Formal CH 0 Colorless pun 1 07 Irritating to the 10 7 0 73 0 Near bottom Incom Detectable dehyde gent suffocating nose plete com odor odor bustion of organics Common air pollut ant fungi cide Gasoline C5H12 Volatile solvent 3 0 Anesthetic 4 000 1 000 13 60 At bottom Service 1 Combusti to Colorless Odor to effects when to stations ble gas indi CgH20 noticeable at 4 0 inhaled Rap 7 000 garages cator 0 03 Flamma idly fatal at storage ble 2 4 Danger tanks 2 Oxygen ous for short houses deficiency exposure at 1 1 indicator to 2 2 Hydrogen Hy Simple asphyxi 0 07 Acts mechani 4 0 74 0 At top Manufac Combustible ant Colorless cally to deprive tured gas gas indicator odorless taste tissues of oxy sludge less Flammable gen Does not digestion support life tank gas electroly sis of wa
60. individual sample volume which will not result in an overfilled sample container under worst case conditions The nominal volume of the composite sample may be calculated by multiplying the programmed nominal sample volume by the total number of samples to be collected In the example 125 ML SAMPLE X 50 SAMPLES 6 250 ML This calculated total volume may vary from the actual total volume because of variations in the actual volume of each indi vidual sample The total time needed to collect the 50 individual samples may vary from the desired 24 hour period because of variations in the average flow rate from the 2 5 MGD figure used in these calculations E 3 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix E Calculating Flow Increment Between Samples E 4 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix F Glossary Bottles per sample Bottles per sample is the number of bottles receiving sample volumes at each sample event Composite sampling In composite sampling multiple sample volumes are placed in bottle sets Typically composite sampling uses a single container A composite sample represents an average of the characteristics of the flow stream for the elapsed time of sampling Controller The controller housed within the molded control box is a collection of electronic components which govern the actions of the sampler It includes the microprocessor RAM Random Access Memory ROM Read Only Memory and its imbedded software the LCD Liquid Cr
61. is a time interval In flow paced sampling the interval between samples is a certain volume of liquid that has passed a measuring point in a flow stream Flow paced sampling requires a flow meter You can interface the 3700 Sampler with Isco Flow meters flow loggers and certain non Isco Flow meters The flow meter measures the flow quantity and sends a pulse for every predetermined flow quantity to the sampler The sampler totalizes the number of pulses received from the flow meter and collects a sample when the total reaches a programmed number 3 2 2 Types of Sample There are two primary types of sample distribution sequential Distribution and composite sampling In a sequential sample each bottle receives one sample A sequential sample represents a snapshot of the flow stream at a particular point in time Figure 3 1 shows a diagram of sequential sample distribution In a composite sample the individual samples are combined com posited into a single container A composite sample represents an average of the characteristics of the flow stream over the total elapsed time of sampling Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SSS SSS Sh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sample Event Number Figure 3 1 Sequential Sample Distribution M Note The 3700 Sampler is fully programmable for both sequential and composite sampling however in addition to program
62. is dry The control box is a completely sealed unit You do not need to open the control box during normal operation The desiccant should absorb any moisture that may accumulate in the control box Thus the humidity indicator should remain blue under normal conditions If moisture does accumulate the numbered areas on the indicator will turn light pink or white starting with the area numbered 20 This indicates that the relative humidity inside the control box exceeds 20 As more moisture accumulates the areas numbered 30 and 40 will turn light pink or white indicating relative humidities of 30 and 40 respectively N CAUTION The control box contains electronic circuitry which may be damaged by static discharge Open the control box only in a static free environment as described in Section 6 2 If the 30 area of the humidity indicator turns light pink or white open the control unit inspect it for leaks and renew the desiccant To do so unscrew the 10 screws indicated in Figure 5 4 around the outer rim of the control box bezel and carefully lift the bezel and cover off the control box Inspect the Control Box If there is a leak repair it by referring to the previous section or by returning the control box to the factory The factory has specialized equipment to detect leaks and thoroughly test the units after repair Renewing the Desiccant If you do not detect a leak see Figure 5 5 Place t
63. is to receive one sample volume The routine will use the start time delay 3 84 Example Extended Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state Access the program sequence by s Select FLOW Sampling electing PROGRAM 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Extended Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling Continued 4 Enter 10 to set the pulse interval to 10 pulses 6 Select SAMPLES BTL 7 Enter 1 to set the number of samples per bottle to 1 8 Enter 800 to set the sample volume at 800 ml 9 Select NO After this message is displayed briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state 11 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here This display appears after you press the start sampling key to start the routine It reports the scheduled start time on the first line The second line reports the current time and date When the scheduled start time arrives the sampler will begin to count flow pulses This display indicates the bottles which will receive sample volumes at the upc
64. make in the configure sequence determine what settings will be available to you in the program sequence When you select the extended programming mode the program sequence is modified to accommodate the extended fea tures by adding one or more input displays The extended programming mode not only extends the number of features available in the program sequence it extends the number of configure options When you select extended pro gramming for example you can enable the Sampling Stop and Resumes and or Nonuniform Times features so you can use them in the extended program sequence When you select the basic programming mode these configure options are not available to you As in the programming sequence less frequently used options have been separated to simplify the configuration process Most configure options are available in both programming modes Table 3 1 summarizes the configure sequence options each option is marked as available in both modes or available only in the extended mode A detailed discussion of each configu ration option is found in the sections beginning with Set Clock through Exit Configuration It is usually not necessary to change the configure option settings unless the sampling application changes significantly The sampler is always programmed and configured the sampler s internal battery maintains program and configure settings In fact the sampler is shipped with factory program and configure sett
65. ml bottles and a 10 foot length of 8 inch vinyl suction line enable the liquid detector and select the basic programming mode Pro cedures for reinitialization of the program settings and configure options to factory settings are placed in Steps 22 through 24 in Example Checking the Configure Option Settings Example Checking the Configure Option Settings If the sampler is not already on press the ON OFF key to turn it on The standby display shown here will appear Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the interactive state The next display you ll see is shown in Step 2 Access the configure sequence by selecting CONFIGURE Select CONFIGURE by pressing the RIGHT ARROW key once When CONFIGURE blinks accept the selection by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key The first option displayed is the Set Clock configure option If the time displayed on the LCD in the standby message is not correct reset the time with the Set Clock configure option Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the Set Clock input display Use this display to reset the time Five entries are required The LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys can be used to move back and forth between each of the five entries Use the arrow keys until the entry you want to change blinks Type in the new time or date press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept it Press the RIGHT ARROW Or ENTER PROGRAM key on the ast entry to store the value
66. nonuniform time intervals with sequential multiplexed and composite sampling 3 3 2 Extended Multiplexing Multiplexing is somewhat more flexible in the extended pro gramming mode than in the basic mode In the extended mode you can switch multiplexed bottles or bottle sets after a pro grammed number of samples have been deposited or after a pro grammed period of time has elapsed Under most conditions we recommend you switch bottles or sets after collecting a pro 3 6 3 3 3 Multiple Bottle Compositing 3 3 4 Stops and Resumes 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines grammed number of samples This allows you to control the number of samples in each bottle When you switch bottles or sets on a time basis the total volume of each bottle or bottle set may vary in samples per bottle multiplexing The extended programming mode offers a third multiplexing pos sibility multiple bottle compositing Multiple bottle compositing combines samples per bottle and bottles per sample multi plexing by depositing multiple samples in a bottle set At each sample event the sampler places a sample into each bottle of a set This is repeated until each bottle of the set contains a pro grammed number of samples Figure 3 4 illustrates multiple bottle compositing You can switch the bottle sets after a pro grammed number of samples have been deposited or after a pro grammed period of time elapses Multiple bottle compositing is
67. remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the left 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Intervals Continued When the start time occurs the sampler will take the first sample The sample event cycle begins with a pre sample purge During the purge the display indicates the receiving bottle number As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears This message remains through the post sample purge This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample event is completed It indicates the bottle number which is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The second line displays the scheduled time for the next event on the left the current time is displayed on the right The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done 1 1 When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date Nonuniform times can be entered in either the method shown in Example Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Intervals or by specifying a clock time and date for each sample On the fol lowing page Example
68. removable inner sleeve to hold the bottles Previously users who wanted multiple bottle configu rations had to purchase different bases with the 3700 Compact they merely remove the inner sleeve and change bottle configura tions The entire 3700 family offers a number of very sophisticated fea tures The following sections provide an overview of the standard and compact units sampling capabilities and a variety of inter facing equipment The end of this chapter provides a brief dis cussion of this interfacing equipment which includes e Teledyne Isco 4200 Series Flow Meters 2100 Series Flow Modules and 4100 Series Flow Loggers collec tively called flow meters throughout this manual for flow paced sampling and sampler enable control e Laptop computers that collect store or transfer the same data from a sampler in the field to a computer in the office The 3700 Standard is designed for operation in hostile environ ments such as sanitary sewers without additional protection The gray acrylonitrile butadiene styrene ABS plastic used in the basic construction of the exterior exhibits good resistance to aqueous solutions containing common acids and bases All of the other external components are made of either stainless steel anodized aluminum polypropylene Noryl or EPDM The 3700 Standard consists of three units the top cover the center section and the base section The removable cover pro tects the control
69. result 2 Planning Advance planning should include arrangements for test equipment tools ventilating equipment protective clothing traffic warning devices ladders safety harness and adequate number of personnel Hasty actions may result in serious injuries Time spent in the manhole should be kept to a minimum 3 Adverse Atmosphere Refer to Table C 1 Hazardous Gases at the end of this appendix Before workers enter a manhole tests should be made for explosive atmosphere presence of hydrogen sulfide and oxygen deficiency Combustible or toxic vapors may be heavier than air so the tests on the atmo sphere must be run at least 3 4 of the way down the manhole Whenever adverse atmosphere is encountered forced venti lation must be used to create safe conditions After the venti lating equipment has been operated for a few minutes the atmosphere in the manhole should be retested before anyone enters the manhole When explosive conditions are encountered the ventilating blower should be placed upwind to prevent igniting any gas that is emerging from the opening When a gasoline engine blower is used it must be located so that exhaust fumes cannot enter the manhole If testing equipment is not available the manhole should be assumed to contain an unsafe atmosphere and forced ventilation must be provided It should never be assumed that a manhole is safe just because there is no odor or the manhole has be
70. revise the configuration settings in the configure sequence We recommend you review the upcoming sections Keypad Description and Displays before you work through the programming examples These sec tions discuss the functions of the individual keys and how to use the keys when programming the sampler 3 Program the sampler Again from standby access the interactive state Select the program sequence Enter the program settings for your routine The sampler will prompt you through the programming process When the process is completed the sampler will automatically return to standby For a more detailed discussion of the programming proce dure see the section Basic Programming Procedure The examples given demonstrate several types of sampling pro grams in the basic mode Examples of extended mode sam pling programs are also shown 4 If desired connect the sampler to a flow meter or other interfacing equipment Start the sampler 5 As the routine is executed the displays will report the sampler s progress The programming examples in this manual conclude with the run state displays you should see for each sampling routine When the routine is done the sampler will return to standby 6 Retrieve the filled sample bottles If you wish use the Dis play Status procedure discussed in detail later in this sec tion to examine the sampler s log of sampling results 7 If you need to reprogram the sampler follow this proce
71. sequence examples for the extended programming sequence follow the section Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure We rec ommend you become familiar with the basic programming mode procedure and examples before using the extended programming mode Most of the procedures used in the extended programming mode duplicate those of the basic mode and are not repeated in the extended programming procedures section Flow charts accompany examples for both programming modes These charts diagram the program sequence structure for each mode Figure 3 8 charts the Basic Programming Mode structure Figures 3 10 3 11 and 3 12 chart the structure of the Extended Programming Mode The charts are provided to act as a map to the programming process Both charts are divided into sections Sample Pacing Sample Distribution Sample Volume and Key Times which correspond to the steps listed in the procedure discussed below Each chart contains the input displays used in the sequence The input displays on each chart are labeled with their display number so they can be cross referenced with the listing found in Appendix D As noted earlier Teledyne Isco ships the sampler with a test program and factory configuration settings The examples in this manual assume that you are using all factory settings and that the sampler will use the 24 bottle base and a 10 foot length of 8 inch vinyl suction line The settings with which your 3700 is shippe
72. signal transmitted during the entire pump cycle from the beginning of the pre sample purge to the end of the post sample purge Select FWD PUMPING when you want a continuous signal transmitted while the pump is delivering a sample volume Display 331 Pulse Signal The Pulse Signal setting will appear when you select PULSE Two options are available The first option PURGE sends a pulse at the beginning of the pre sample 3 51 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 9 16 Purge Counts 3 9 17 Tubing Life 3 9 18 Program Lock 3 9 19 Sampler ID 3 9 20 Run Diagnostics 3 52 purge The second option FWD PUMPING sends a pulse at the beginning of the sample delivery when the pump is running forward Display 332 The Purge Counts option is used to override the number of pump counts needed to clear the suction line in both pre sample purge and post sample purge cycles The pre sample purge count is normally set to 150 counts and will be reset to this value if the sampler is reinitialized The post sample purge count is derived from the suction line diameter and length settings If your observations indicate that a greater or lesser number of pump counts in either purge is needed you can change the count settings Entries are to be between 0 and 9 999 for both purges You can obtain a purge count using the pump forward or pump reverse keys Display s 340 and 341 The Tubing Lif
73. tasteless tains 20 8 of ferent levels depletion ciency indica Supports com O2 Man can tol from poor tor bustion erate down to ventila 12 Minimum tion and safe 8 hour absorp exposure 14 to tion or 16 Below 10 chemical dangerous to consump life Below 5 to tion of 7 probably oxygen fatal Ozone O3 Irritant and poi 1 66 Max naturally 0 08 0 04 Near bottom Where Detectable sonous Strong occurring level ozone is odor electrical odor is 0 04 ppm used for at 0 015 ppm Strong oxidizer 0 05 ppm disinfec Colorless At 1 causes irrita tion ppm strong sul tion of eyes and fur like odor nose 1 to 10 ppm causes headache nau sea can cause coma Symp toms similar to radiation dam age C 8 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures Table C 1 Hazardous Gases Continued Explosive Likely Spacie Max Max Safe Simplest and i gt f Chemical Common Gravity Physiological Safe 60 8 Hour pange by Larsen LS Cheapest Formula Properties onyapor Effect Min Exposure Exposure volam alr Gu common Safe Method Density ppm ppm Limits Highest Sources of Testing Air 1 lower upper Concentration Sludge Mostly a simple Variable Will not support No data Would 5 3 19 3 Near top of From See compo Gas asphyxiant May life vary widely with composition structure digestion nents be p
74. technician for additional suggestions You may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC help ful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Prob lems This book is available from the U S Government printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 00 0035404 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures 2 1 Assembly and Disassembly of the Case 2 2 Preparing the Base Section 2 2 1 Standard Base Section 2 2 2 Compact Base Section To place your sampler into operation prepare the base section attach the suction line connect a power source place the sampler at the sampling site place the suction line properly in the liquid source and interface an external flow meter if used with the sampler You can program the sampler on site or in the office Guidelines for programming the sampler are in Section 3 Disassemble the case by separating the cover and base from the center section To remove the cover unlatch the three black rubber draw catches and lift off the cover To gain access to the base section unlatch the three lower stainless steel latches and lift the center section straight up Reassemble the case by reversing this procedure The 3700 Standard s sequential base section is supplied with 24 wide mouth cylindrical glass bottles with a capacity of 350 ml each or 24 wide mouth wedge shaped polypropylene bottles with a capacity of
75. the flow rate monitored by the flow meter is higher than anticipated and the flow pulse interval 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines has not been adjusted to reflect the higher rate If this occurs the sampler will continue the first bottle group until all samples have been taken You can adjust the pulse interval by e Reprogramming the flow meter to change the number of flow pulses sent to the sampler by the flow meter e Reprogramming the sampler to change the flow pulse interval in the flow pacing segment of the STORM routine e Reprogramming both the flow meter and the sampler STORM Key Times The third section STORM Key Times contains the displays used to e Enter suction head measurements e Enable the calibration routine e Enter a start time for the storm routine The input displays of the STORM program sequence vary according to configure option settings The first two displays SUCTION HEAD OF FEET and CALIBRATE SAMPLE VOLUME appear if the sampler is configured to add them to the storm program sequence Entries in the Liquid Detector con figure option and the Calibrate Sampler configure option add or exclude these displays from the sequence Example Storm Sam pling does not include these displays To enter a specific start time for the routine select YES in Display 90 illustrated in Step 17 of Example Storm Sampling The sampler will prompt you to enter a start time wit
76. the power cable or wiring harness should be suspected To view schematic drawings of the circuit boards discussed in this section first find the serial number on your controller then go to our web site www isco com Go to Training and Support and select Product Support Click Automatic Wastewater Sam plers In the left margin click Schematics Enter the serial number of your instrument then click Get Schematics to view a list of PDF files that contain the available schematics If you suspect an electronic problem Teledyne Isco strongly rec ommends calling the Teledyne Isco Technical Service Department at 866 298 6174 or 402 464 0231 outside the U S A Canada and Mexico The Service department will provide information on how to return the sampler or subassemblies to the factory for service For example you can remove the pump assembly distributor assembly or control box and return them separately for servicing The Teledyne Isco Service department has trained technicians and specially designed equipment necessary for timely efficient repair of the sampler If you wish to attempt repairs the Teledyne Isco Technical Service Department is available to provide advice on servicing When you attempt to isolate problems within the unit assume that the CPU and memory are working properly until you have eliminated the possible causes listed in Section 6 3 6 1 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing 6 2 6 1 3 Remov
77. the program should resume 4 00 p m or 16 00 in military time 18 Enter the time and date the program should resume 4 00 p m or 16 00 in military time After this message displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state 19 Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 3 93 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Sampling with Stops and Resumes Continued 20 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here This display appears as the sampler counts down the time remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the left and the current time on the right When the start time arrives the sampler will take the first sample The sample event cycle begins with a pre sample purge During the purge the display indicates the bottle number which will receive the sample volume As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears This message remains through the post sample purge This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample event is completed It indicate
78. to second group is equal to or greater than if necessary the delay to the first group plus the total amount of time required to fill the first group The sampler will begin timing both delays delay to first and delay to second bottle group at the same time Refer to the lower diagram in Figure 3 17 Entries made in Display s 15 23 and 24 MINUTE DELAY TO FIRST GROUP SAMPLE TAKE TIMED EVENTS and SAMPLE INTERVALS OF MINUTES determine the amount of time required to fill the first bottle group 3 75 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 76 For example if the delay to the first group were 0 and the routine required two timed sample events at 30 minute intervals the sampler would take 30 minutes to fill the first bottle group The first sample event would occur after the programmed delay to group sample the second sample event would occur 30 minutes later Use Display 24 to enter the time interval for the second bottle group You can use any interval you do not have to use the same time interval for the second bottle group that you used for the first group Flow Pacing for the second bottle group If you need a flow paced sample for the second bottle group select FLOW from Display 14 Three flow pacing displays 16 22 and 110 will follow Display 16 Display 22 Display 110 Use Display 16 to determine when the sampler will begin filling the se
79. types of suction lines available for use with the 3700 sampler 4 inch vinyl s inch vinyl and 8 inch PTFE Teflon If you specify 4 inch line the sampler will prompt you for the line length immediately If you specify s inch line the sampler prompts you to specify vinyl or PTFE before prompting for the line length Display s 230 and 231 The sampler will accept suction line lengths of 3 to 99 feet When measuring the line do not include the tube coupling or the strainer in the measurement The line should be cut to even foot lengths such as 6 not 6 5 feet Display 232 3 9 5 Liquid Detector 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines You can use the Liquid Detector configure option to turn the liquid detector on or off set the number of rinse cycles add a suction head setting to the program sequence and set the number of sampling retries should the suction line become clogged The option uses four input displays Each display is dis cussed below Enable Disable Detector Teledyne Isco recommends setting the Enable Disable Detector option to ENABLE The 3700 Sampler determines the delivered sample volume suction head by counting revolutions of the peristaltic pump rotor The volume of liquid delivered by one revolution of the pump rotor is a function of the suction head as the suction head increases the volume delivered by one revolution of the pump rotor decreases By enabling the
80. useful when you want a series of identical sets of samples or a larger volume composite sample than you can collect in one bottle You can use multiple bottle compositing with time paced or flow paced routines The Sampling Stops and Resumes feature available in the extended programming mode allows you to create an inter mittent sampling schedule You can program the sampler to stop the routine at a specific time and then resume the routine later You can enter as many as 12 stop times and 12 resume times Stops and resumes can be used with time paced and flow paced routines and with routines programmed for nonuniform time intervals Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ZA A FAA E A ER A 3 3 6 6 2 2 5 5 8 8 1 1 4 4 7 7 Sample Event Number Figure 3 4 Multiple Bottle Compositing 3 4 Stormwater Sampling The 3700 Sampler s STORM programming lets you meet storm water monitoring requirements easily The 3700 Portable s STORM pacing program divides the bottles of the 2 4 8 and 24 bottle configurations into two separate groups The first group receives a first flush time paced grab sample The second bottle group receives either a flow paced or time paced composite sample The 3700 Compact s 24 bottle configuration can also be used for STORM programming 3 7 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 4 1 Sto
81. when you have started a routine after the programmed first switch time Select YES to enter a new switch time Selecting NO will switch one bottle set and start the routine immediately Display 143 This display appears after you press the display status key Select REVIEW to view the summary of the current pro gram settings and for sampling results Select PRINT to send the current status program settings and sampling results to an Isco Field Printer NOTE The Teledyne Isco Field Printer is no longer sold but this function remains available for customers who still have Field Printers The printed results include data for sample events completed when you pressed the display status key Display 148 This display appears after you select Print in Display 148 Select NO to return to standby Select Settings to print the settings report Select RESULTS to print the results report Display 149 This display appears after you select REVIEW in Display 148 Select NO to return to the previous operating state Select SETTINGS to view the summary of the current program settings Select RESULTS to view the sampling results for sample events completed at the time you pressed the display status key Display 150 Display 151 is used to identify the displays used to summarize the current program settings which appear when you select SETTINGS in
82. you do not want to reinitialize the settings Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection The steps in Example Time Paced Sequential Sampling program the sampler to take samples every 30 minutes Each bottle is to receive one 250 ml sample volume The sampling routine is to begin according to the start time delay one minute after you press the START SAMPLING key Example Time Paced Sequential Sampling 1 If the sampler is not already on press the ON OFF key to turn it on The standby display shown here will appear Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 2 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM Because PROGRAM will already be selected blinking press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept it and move to the next step 3 To enter the interval between samples in time increments select TIME If TIME is already blinking press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection If FLOW is blinking press the LEFT ARROW key once so that TIME blinks Then press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept TIME 4 This display requires two entries one for the hours one for the minutes Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to accept the number 0 and move to the minutes entry shown in step 5 entry 6 For this example select NO Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to
83. 0 p m and continue again until 6 00 p m When the sampling stops at 6 00 p m fewer than 24 samples may have been taken Note that the Sampling Stop and Resumes configure option has settings that allow you to take a sample at the stop and resume times See the section Sampling Stop Resume Example Sampling with Stops and Resumes 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 2 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM 5 Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Sampling with Stops and Resumes Continued 6 Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 7 Enter 1 to set the number of bottles per sample event to 1 8 Select SAMPLES 9 Enter 1 to set the number of samples per bottle to 1 10 Enter 500 to set the sample volume at 500 ml 11 Select YES 13 Enter 5 There are three stop times and two resume times 14 Enter the time and date of the first stop time 8 00 a m 15 Enter the time and date the program should resume 11 00 a m 16 Enter the time and date of the second stop time 1 30 p m or 13 30 You must enter the times in military time 17 Enter the time and date
84. 05 861 2355 ISO 9002 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET September 28 1998 SORB IT Packaged Desiccant SECTION IV FIRE EXPLOSION DATA Fire and Explosion Hazard Negligible fire and explosion hazard when exposed to heat or flame by reaction with incompatible substances Flash Point Nonflammable Firefighting Media Dry chemical water spray or foam For larger fires use water spray fog or foam Firefighting Nonflammable solids liquids or gases Cool containers that are exposed to flames with water from the side until well after fire is out For massive fire in enclosed area use unmanned hose holder or monitor nozzles if this is impossible withdraw from area and let fire burn Withdraw immediately in case of rising sound from venting safety device or any discoloration of the tank due to fire SECTION V HEALTH HAZARD DATA Health hazards may arise from inhalation ingestion and or contact with the skin and or eyes Ingestion may result in damage to throat and esophagus and or gastrointestinal disorders Inhalation may cause burning to the upper respiratory tract and or temporary or permanent lung damage Prolonged or repeated contact with the skin in absence of proper hygiene may cause dryness irritation and or dermatitis Contact with eye tissue may result in irritation burns or conjunctivitis First Aid Inhalation Remove to fresh air immediately If breathing has stopped give artificial respiration Ke
85. 1 000 ml each Although sets of glass and plastic bottles are interchangeable in the base you cannot mix glass and plastic bottles in the same base The 3700 Standard is shipped from the factory with the sample bottles in place For first time use the only preparation nec essary will be to remove the bottle caps You can store these bottle caps in the center of the base if you are not using ice For subsequent uses place new or cleaned bottles in the base Take care that all bottles are fitted properly into the base before replacing the bottle retaining ring All 24 bottles must be installed in the base to assure that they are properly held in place The bottle numbers molded into the base indicate the order in which the bottles are filled On the 3700 Compact the inner sleeve is numerically coded to indicate which bottle is which You can choose whichever bottle configuration s you wish for your sampler when you order it The center section of the 3700 Compact is keyed so it will only go on the proper way because it is important that the distributor arm stops at the first bottle to ensure proper sequencing 2 1 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures 2 2 3 Bottles 2 3 Cooling the Samples 2 4 Suction Line 2 2 Glass Bottles In the 3700 Standard install the stainless steel retaining ring for the glass bottles inside the circle of bottles It expands outward to hold the bottles firmly against the interior wall
86. 268 SHEET 9 OF 10 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists 603703268 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST SHEET 10 OF 10 TELEDYNE ISCO INC REV R DATE 081111 Ui PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 59 693703282 RING TRI 60 603703032 LABEL CONTROL PANEL 64 603708003 CONTROL PANEL STUD ASSEMBLY 66 693704003 WIRING ASSEMBLY KEYPAD 68 693704180 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY 3700 CPU 69 6031703028 STANDOFF 1 4 HEX SST 6 32M F X 781 10 693703008 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SHIELD 12 209902138 ION CLIP 3 8 DIA 7 602703010 ONTROL BOX GASKET S T5 231514510 CREW CAP SST 8 32 X 5 8 83 603703294 Fl SHIELD GRIP PLATE T 13 490001300 H DITY INDICATOR CARD S R 84 090402600 SQUARE FOAM FASTENER NOTE For current prices and quotations on parts contact Isco Service Department 2 This list is subject to change without notice 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix B Accessories The following appendix contains the most commonly ordered accessories for the 3700 sampler including part descriptions and order numbers For additional accessories contact Teledyne Isco Customer Service or your local sales representative
87. 3 and the bottles per sample event is set at 1 Enter the new switch time This display appears when you select YES in display 143 and the bott greater than one Enter the new swit ne Display 143 Display 46 les per sample event is set to a number ch time Display 47 Example Program S tarted Later Than Programmed Stop Time standby This display informs you of the expired stop time The sampler presents this display for a short time then reverts to You must access the program sequence to change the expired stop and changes start the routine again with the resume times Once you ve made the start sampling key 3 17 Displayed Selections and Messages 3 100 Start Sampling Once you have programmed and configured the sampler use the START SAMPLING key to run the sampling program There are two instances where the sampler will not be able to run the program immediately When the program has been started after the programmed start time or after one or more programmed stop times When you press the START SAMPLING key after a program has been halted the sampler will give you the choice between resuming the program and starting the program by presenting the display illustrated below 3 17 1 Additional Displays 3 17 2 Display Status 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Select START
88. 3700 Portable Samplers Installation and Operation Guide ae TELEDYNE ISCO Everywhereyoulook Part 60 3703 267 of Assembly 60 3704 101 Copyright 1994 All rights reserved Teledyne Isco Inc Revision NN January 30 2013 Foreword This instruction manual is designed to help you gain a thorough understanding of the operation of the equipment Teledyne Isco recommends that you read this manual completely before placing the equipment in service Although Teledyne Isco designs reliability into all equipment there is always the possi bility of a malfunction This manual may help in diagnosing and repairing the malfunc tion If the problem persists call or e mail the Teledyne Isco Technical Service Department for assistance Simple difficulties can often be diagnosed over the phone If it is necessary to return the equipment to the factory for service please follow the shipping instructions provided by the Customer Service Department including the use of the Return Authorization Number specified Be sure to include a note describing the malfunction This will aid in the prompt repair and return of the equipment Teledyne Isco welcomes suggestions that would improve the information presented in this manual or enhance the operation of the equipment itself Teledyne Isco is continually improving its products and reserves the right to change product specifications replacement parts schematics and instruc tions without noti
89. 4 045 FLOAT AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY 21 60 3704 185 12 GLASS BOTTLE EXPANDER RING 22 291 0001 00 BLACK POLYPROPYLENE CAP WITH SOLID POLY LINER 23 60 9003 235 RETAINING RING 24 BOTTLE 24 60 3704 168 3700C TOP COVER ASSEMBLY 25 60 3704 170 3700C CENTER SECTION ASSEMBLY 15 16 RE RE A 7 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists A 3 3700 Controller THIS DRAWING REPRESENTS A PROPRIETARY PRODUCT OF TELEDYNE ISCO INC LINCOLN NEBRASKA AND SHALL NOT BE RELEASED DISCLOSED USED OR DUPLICATED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF TELEDYNE ISCO INC TELEDYNE ISCO INC R THIS DRAWING PREPARED CREATED MM 02015 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI ASME Y14 5M 1994 DRAWN MM 02015 SCALE 0 500 APPROVED NCE 03289 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 3100 CONTROLLER CE 07 40 I 113 89CE0 09 ON ONIMVYQ A 8 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists Desiccant bags part 099 0002 08 REFER TO Ze T IE REFER TO EXPLODED VIEW EXPLODED VIEW TO Screw 10 32 x 3 4 REFER TO EXPLODED VIEW PUMP TUBING ASSEMBLY REFER TQ ASSEMBLED VIEW DRAWING NO Flat Washer 8 Locknut 603703268 SHEET 2 oF i0 Lock Washer 8 10 32 Screw 8 32 x 3 4 6 For mounting controller to center section A 9 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts
90. 4 Bottle Rack with Hold Down 24 Bottle to 4 Bottle Conversion 1 gallon polyethylene bottle with cap 1 gallon glass bottle with cap 2 ProPak starter kit Includes 24 holders with caps 100 1 liter bags retaining ring instruction video instruction sheet ProPak holders w caps and standard bags quantity 25 Includes instruction sheet ProPak disposable bags 1 liter polyethylene quantity 100 Includes instruction sheet ProPak disposable bags 1 liter polyethylene quantity 500 Includes instruction sheet ProPak disposable bags 1 liter polyethylene quantity 1 000 Includes instruction sheet Holder retaining ring for 24 ProPak holders B 3 Suction Lines and B 2 Strainers 38 ID x 10 vinyl suction line with standard weighted polypropylene strainer 3 3 ID x 25 vinyl suction line with standard weighted polypropylene strainer 8 ID x 10 PTFE suction line with protective coating without strainer 3 3 ID x 25 PTFE suction line with protective coating without strainer 1 4 ID vinyl tubing bulk 100 ea cc et ca Cd mend owt ae rrera 1 4 ID vinyl tubing bulk 500 inc sata Mane na cw cry reaaw eee eetnnte Ten 1 4 ID vinyl tubing bulk 1000 viet net tt DAT Tim ei 3 3 ID vinyl tubing b
91. 41 43 Time paced Segment l Flow paced Segment Time Bottle Group Flow Bottle Group Figure 3 5 Storm Distribution Scheme 3 5 Programming The sampler s programming process is self prompting Prompts Introduction displayed on the LCD step you through the programming sequence in a logical order indicating the needed value or option For example the sampler will prompt you to enter settings for the interval between samples select either time paced or flow paced intervals sample volume in ml and other operating controls These settings can be changed at any time The sampler accepts only appropriate values for the program settings and rejects any unacceptable values If you turn off the unit or the power is disconnected the lithium battery retains settings in the sampler s memory 3 5 1 Operating States There are three operating states the standby state where the sampler is waiting for your instructions the run state where the sampler is running a sampling routine and the interactive state which is used to program the sampler Each state serves a dif ferent purpose and is discussed separately Standby State In the standby state the sampler is waiting for your instructions From standby you can start a sampling routine placing the sampler in the run state You can also access the interactive state which is discussed in an upcoming section 3 8 8 5 2 Programming Modes 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guideli
92. Carbon dioxide carbon monoxide water Decomposition Products HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION Conditions None May Occur To Avoid Optional Indicating Silica Gel G 6 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets Page 2 Section 5 Health Hazard Data PRIMARY ROUTES inhalation Ingestion CARCINOGEN ONTP CIOSHA OF ENTRY Skin Absorption Not Hazardous LISTED IN IARC Monograph LINot Listed HEALTH HAZARDS Acute May cause eye skin and mucous membrane irritation Chronic Prolonged inhalation may cause lung damage Signs and Symptoms Drying and irritation of Exposure Medical Conditions Asthma Generally Aggravated by Exposure EMERGENCY FIRST AID PROCEDURES Seek medical assistance for further treatment observation and support if necessary Eye Contact Flush with water for at least 15 minutes Skin Wash affected area with soap and water Contact Inhalation Remove affected person to fresh air Ingestion Drink at least 2 glasses of water Section 6 Control and Protective Measures Use NIOSH approved dust mask or respirator Respiratory Protection Specify Type Protective Light cotton gloves Gloves UO Local Exhaust L_ Mechanical General Eye Protection Safety glasses VENTILATION TO BE USED Special _ lOther Specify Other Protective None Clothing and Equipment Hygienic Work Avoid raising dust Avoid contact with skin eyes and clothing Prac
93. GRAM key at this display to access the Suction Line input displays shown in steps 11 to 13 Select 1 4 if you are using 4 inch suction line 8 if you are using inch suction line Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection If you select My you will not see the display shown in step 12 instead you will be prompted for the suction line length as shown in step 73 You do not need to specify vinyl line type because only 14 inch suction line is available This display appears when you have selected hg in step 11 Select VINYL if you are using vinyl suction line TEFLON if you are using TEFLON suction line Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection Enter the length of the suction line Do not include the tube coupling or the strainer in the length Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry and move to step 14 If you change the suction line settings the CALCULATING PUMP TABLE VALUES message will appear for a short time Press the ENTER PROGRAM key at this display to access the Liquid Detector input displays shown in steps 15 to 18 3 24 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 The sampler displays the software revision number for a short period of time The software revision display will be replaced by the RAM and ROM test m
94. HA jointly approved respirator in the absence of proper environmental control Contact your safety equipment supplier for proper mask type Ventilation Provide general and or local exhaust ventilation to keep exposures below the TLV Ventilation used must be designed to prevent spots of dust accumulation or recycling of dusts Protective Clothing Wear protective clothing including long sleeves and gloves to prevent repeated or prolonged skin contact Eye Protection Chemical splash goggles designed in compliance with OSHA regulations are recommended Consult your safety equipment supplier 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets 101 Christine Drive Belen New Mexico 87002 SUD CHEMIE Phone 505 864 6691 _ Fax 505 861 2355 Performance Packaging ISO 9002 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET September 28 1998 SORB IT Packaged Desiccant SECTION IX SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS Avoid breathing dust and prolonged contact with skin Silica gel dust causes eye irritation and breathing dust may be harmful No Information Available HMIS Hazardous Materials Identification System for this product is as follows Health Hazard 0 Flammability 0 Reactivity 0 Personal Protection HMIS assigns choice of personal protective equipment to the customer as the raw material supplier is unfamiliar with the condition of use The information contained herein is based upon data cons
95. Isco These instructions are for customers who still have Field Printers For information on the reports produced by the Field Printer refer to the Field Printer Instruction Manual When you select PRINT Display 149 appears Use this display to select the settings or results report The sampler will interrupt the reports to take a sample if necessary Select NO to return to standby Display 149 The sampler will display one of two messages as it sends the data to the printer The first message informs you that the trans mission is in progress The second message is a warning informing you that the sampler is unable to detect the printer If you see the warning message check the cable connections between the printer and the sampler Example Reviewing the Sampling Results Press display status to view the results of the sampling program Select REVIEW Select RESULTS This display reports the start time and date of the program Press ENTER PROGRAM to advance to the next display 3 103 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Reviewing the Sampling Results Continued 5 This display reports the nominal sample volume Press ENTER PROGRAM to advance to the next display 6 This display reports the bottle number s for each sample event It also reports the source of the event in this case the sample
96. Liquid Detector configu re options press the ENTER PROGRAM key Continue to scroll through the configure options with the right arrow key When you have checked the settings for the desired options press the EXIT PROGRAM key to return to standby 4 4 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to reenter the interactive state Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM Select TIME Enter O to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 Enter the sample volume 250 Note that the upper limit of the range of acceptable volumes has been adjusted When you want to collect 48 samples the maximum sample volume is 310 ml If you need to use a larger sample volume you must adjust the sample number downward Select YES to enter the start time for the routine 3 35 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Composite Sampling Continued 21 Enter the start time and date 6 00 on June 20 22 After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPLING key to run the program After this messages displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state Th
97. Lists 603103268 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST SHEET 3 OF 10 TELEDYNE ISCO INC REV R DATE 08111 a PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 603703252 DESICCANT TRAY CE 2 603704154 PUMP GEAR CASE ASSEMBLY CE 3 603 041 51 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY CE POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A 603704149 BACK PLATE STUD ASSEMBLY CE 5 603704089 CONTROL BOX MODIFICATION ASSEMBLY 6 202907010 O RING 100 ID 070 CROSS SECTION T 140100600 PLUG PANE OUNT 6 amp 6 P 8 603113024 CONNECTOR PROTECTOR CAP MEDIUM 9 60370409 PRINTER CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 0 1401002001 PLUG PANEL MOUNT 4 PIN W ANGLE BRACKET 603113032 CONNECTOR CAP GASKET MEDIUM 2 202999904 LIP SEAL 1 000 ID X 1 500 OD 3 202100135 O RING 1 925 ID 103 CROSS SECTION 4 202999903 LIP SEAL 375 ID X 750 OD 5 603704019 PUMP HOUSING ASSEMBLY INSIDE 6 603703012 PUMP HOUSING BUSHING T cal 14512 SCREW MACHINE 8 32 X 3 4 PAN HEAD SLOTTED SST SELF SEALING O RING 8 602704019 PUMP ROTOR ASSEMBLY 9 603704017 PUMP HOUSING ASSEMBLY OUTSIDE 20 60370402 DETECTOR LID ASSEMBLY 2 603704022 DETECTOR BASE ASSEMBLY te 202401231 O RING 1 231 ID 103 CROSS SECTION SILICONE 23 603704152 CONT
98. M key to exit the configure sequence You can exit the configuration sequence at any time using the EXIT PROGRAM key 3 53 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Table 3 4 Factory Configure Option Settings Configure Option Display Number __ Factory Setting SET CLOCK 210 Not Reset BOTTLES AND SIZE 220 221 222 223 Not Reset SUCTION LINE 230 231 232 Not Reset LIQUID DETECTOR liquid detector 240 ENABLE rinses 241 0 enter head manually 242 NO of retries 243 0 PROGRAMMING MODE 250 BASIC LOAD STORED PROGRAM 255 SAVE CURRENT PROGRAM 260 FLOW MODE SAMPLING sample at start time 270 NO sample at switch times 271 NO NONUNIFORM TIME 280 MINUTES CALIBRATE SAMPLER 290 DISABLE SAMPLING STOP RESUME 300 DISABLE sample at stop times 301 NO sample at resume times 302 NO START TIME DELAY 310 2 ENABLE PIN master slave 320 DISABLE sample upon disable 321 NO sample upon enable 322 NO reset sample interval 323 NO inhibit countdown 324 NO EVENT MARK continuous pulse 330 CONTINUOUS SIGNAL pump cycle fwd only 331 FWD PUMPING ONLY purge fwd pumping 332 FWD PUMPING PURGE COUNTS pre sample counts 340 150 post sample counts 341 BASED ON LINE LENGTH TUBING LIFE reset pump counter 351 NO 3 54 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Table 3 4 Factory Configure Option Settings Continued
99. NE INJ BR J A 4 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists DRAWING NO 60 3703 261 REVISION H PAGE 4 of 4 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 052708 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER 60 3704 034 3700 COMPOSITE BASE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION 69 9003 618 TEFLON LINER 110MM X 020 THICK 291 0000 00 GLASS BOTTLE 2 5 GALLON WITH CAP BALE 35 60 3703 062 COMPOSITE BOTTLE INSERT 36 299 0013 04 BOTTLE 2 5 GALLON WITH CAP NALGENE 37 60 3704 045 FLOAT AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY 38 60 3704 046 PUMP TUBING ASSEMBLY 34 5 A 5 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists A 2 Compact Portable 3700 Zo 12 LS So pe IS ET EA tasso el 60 3703 262 REV J A 6 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists DRAWING NO 60 3703 262 REVISION J SHEET 2 OF 2 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 03021 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIPTION 60 3704 135 DISTRIBUTOR ARM ASSEMBLY 7 60 9004 131 BOTTLE CARRIER 12 BOTTLE 11 299 0334 00 CAP WITH FOAM LINER 500ML POLYPROPYLENE SE 291 0000 00 GLASS BOTTLE 2 5 GALLON WITH CAP BALE 299 0013 04 BOTTLE 2 5 GALLON WITH CAP NALGENE 60 3704 186 GLASS CAP ASSEMBLY TEFLON LINED 291 0011 10 BOTTLE 375ML GLASS 20 60 370
100. Printer Connector Wiring 4 4 C 1 Hazardous Gase s 6 7 sie hts See Beles ee ee yee ds PE ew ee C 6 D b Display Index 3 445004 he LENS LR RE a eres wl Se te D 1 List of Examples Checking the Configure Option Settings 3 23 Time Paced Sequential Sampling 3 26 Flow Paced Sequential Sampling 3 28 Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling 3 29 Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling 3 32 Time Paced Composite Sampling 3 34 Calibration us esse rer ni dea eed Ohba ENA e nee do 3 37 Load Stored Program 3 44 Save Current Program 14 24i44l4iu eee ea een ee eden dee ma 3 45 Time Paced Sampling Uniform Intervals 3 80 Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling 3 82 Extended Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling 3 84 Flow Paced Sampling Time Based Bottle Sets 3 87 xi 3700 Portable Samplers Table of Contents xii Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Intervals 3 89 Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Clock Times 3 92 Sampling with Stops and Re
101. ROL BOX SUB ASSEMBLY CE NOTE For current prices and quotations on parts contact Isco Service Department 2 This list is subject to change without notice A 10 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists 603703268 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST SHEET 4 OF 10 TELEDYNE ISCO INC REV R DATE 081111 i PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 24 231019508 SCREW MACHINE 8 32 X 1 2 PAN HEAD PHILLIPS SST SELF SEALING O RING oS 602703170 STANDOFF 6 32 X 25 HEX X 3 00 LONG MALE SST 6 202300016 O RING 614 ID 070 CROSS SECTION 62 202307017 O RING 676 ID 070 CROSS SECTION T1 603704173 DISTRIBUTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY CE 18 603703218 PUMP HOUSING BUSHING 19 609003250 DRAIN CAP STRAP 80 202400114 O RING 612 ID 103 CROSS SECTION NOTE For current prices and quotations on parts contact Isco Service Department 2 This list is subject to change without notice 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists DRAWING NO 6031703268 SHEET 5 OF 10 A 12 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST TELEDYNE ISCO INC 6031703268
102. SAMPLING key a dash with the MANUAL SAMPLE key and a period with the RESUME SAMPLING key Run Diagnostics performs a number of diagnostic functions This option contains the software revision number tests the sampler s RAM Random Access Memory ROM Read Only Memory 3 9 21 Exit Configuration 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines display distributor and pump and lets you reinitialize RAM The display information is discussed below in order of appearance Software Revision Number The sampler will display the software revision number for a short period of time Test RAM and ROM RAM and ROM test messages replaced the software revision display A successful test is indicated by the messages RAM PASSED TEST or ROM PASSED TEST If either RAM or ROM fail the test the sampler displays one of the following messages RAM FAILED TEST or ROM FAILED TEST and beeps every three seconds until you turn it off If either the RAM or ROM fail the test service the sampler Contact Teledyne Isco Customer Service for assistance LCD Test After successful RAM and ROM tests the sampler will then test the LCD by first filling the display with solid rect angles and then printing the alphabet and other characters Each character position in the display should contain a character Pump Test The next step tests the pump During the test the pump will run briefly and the display will indicate an
103. Section 2 1 and turn the center section over as shown in Figure 5 1 3 Unscrew the distributor arm retaining nut indicated in Figure 5 1 and pull the arm off the distributor shaft Do not manually rotate the distributor arm CAUTION Do not attempt to manually rotate the distributor arm Severe damage to the distributor drive mechanism may result 4 Pull the pump tube out of the distributor arm and coil spring assembly 5 Turn the center section back over and pull the tube out of the pump tube port indicated in Figure 5 1 6 Detach the outer case of the liquid detector by loosening the two captive thumbscrews as shown in Figure 5 2 Pull the tubing away from the detector 7 Remove the outer pump lid by loosening the four captive thumbscrews indicated in Figure 5 2 This will expose the pump tubing which is squeezed between the pump rollers and the curved surface of the inner pump lid as shown in Figure 5 3 8 Extract the tubing from the pump The pump rollers can be rotated manually to facilitate the removal of the tubing After the tubing is removed clean the interior of the pump case thoroughly 9 Remove the suction line if attached as described in the section Replacement of Suction Line 5 4 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance Distributor Arm Located at Bottle 1 Pump Tube Port f CT Retaining Nut A Distributor Arm e e 9 o eet ed Figure 5 1 Inter
104. State Displays Flow Paced Sam pling and Run State Displays Composite Sampling If you encounter a problem while running a sampling routine that results in missed samples an asterisk will appear in the lower right corner of the display as illustrated below There is one condition under which the sampler will enter the run state after the start sampling key is pressed but will not begin the sampling program If the sampler is interfaced with a flow meter liquid level actuator or other equipment capable of transmitting an inhibit signal the sampler will not begin the 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines program until the inhibit signal is suspended The sampler will use the following display to inform you that the sampler is inhibited Sampler Inhibited Display Example Run State Displays Time Paced Sampling Indicates the bottle number of the next sequential sample The second line reports the scheduled sample event time followed by the current time Indicates the scheduled time and receiving bottle numbers for an upcoming sample event The sampling program requires four bottles per sample event Indicates the number of the upcoming sample the total number of samples each bottle is to receive and the current bottle number The program requires four samples per bottle Indicates the sample and bottle numbers of the next sample event The bottle set consists o
105. T in L L L L L 7 Bi z EL o Fa RE LE 4 R46 J Ret o O u rez 014 o oer 1 i hes m 1 za ooo prep N 1 F o iS 5 ca Rae ZE au J L u nu N Qu m mo T me E u u waa mmm CR i k k k ca EE amp CERS 4 F Ed R7 RE RIZ z4 Riz Res Gig 4E Figure 6 6 Main Circuit Board Component Layout 6 11 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing 6 3 3 Pump Control Board The pump control board Figure 6 7 is an integral part of the pump assembly and serves two functions controlling the pump motor and sensing pump revolutions The pump motor control consists of a 2 pole double throw relay K201 and transistor switches Q201 Q202 and Q203 The relay changes the pumping direction and will run the pump in reverse when in the rest state Each time the pump runs the microprocessor sends the pumping direction signal through pin 1 of P7 waits for the relay to change state then starts the pump by sending a high signal through pin 3 of P7 By waiting for the relay to change state before applying power you can prevent arcing at the relay contacts The LED photo transistor device IC201 is a key element of the pump revolution count sensor Whenever the pump is running power is supplied to IC201 A rotating disk positioned between the LED and photo transistor periodically interrupts the trans mitted signal These interruptions create pulses which are sent back to the main board at pin 8 of P7 to be counte
106. Time Diagram for STORM Routines 3 14 Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure The 3700 Samplers provide displays in French Spanish and German Additionally the software supports entries in metric units of measure Metric units include volumes in milliliters suction head and suction line length in decimeters and suction line ID in millimeters Samplers using French Spanish and German language displays support metric units for suction line and suction head measure ments Samplers with English displays support either English or metric units for suction line and suction head measurements Always enter sample volumes in milliliters To program the sampler for foreign language displays begin by placing the sampler in standby Then be sure the sampler is con figured for extended programming Access the language pro gramming sequence by pressing the stop key five times The standby display will be replaced by the input display illustrated below 3 79 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 15 Extended Programming Examples Select the preferred language from this display If you select French Spanish or German the sampler will automatically convert English units of measure to metric units and return to standby If you select English a second input display will appear Select the units from this display After you ve made the selection the sampler will convert the units of measure as requi
107. Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Clock Times shows the displays used to enter the clock times The type of display clock time or minutes used in the program sequence is controlled by the settings in the Nonuniform Times configure option you must specify either clock time or minutes in that con figure option 3 91 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines previously entered time Example Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Clock Times 1 Enter the time and date for the first sample event Times and dates are entered on the second line of the display 2 Enter the time and date for the second sample event The controller will guess a time at the hour succeeding the 3 Enter the time and date for the third sample event WE ob 4 Continue to enter times and dates for each sample event After all sample event times have been entered the sample distribution section of the programming sequence will appear 3 Select TIME 4 Select UNIFORM 3 92 Example Sampling with Stops and Resumes shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at uniform time intervals of 15 minutes starting at 6 00 a m on the following day One 500 ml sample is to be placed in each bottle The sampling is to continue from 6 00 a m until 8 00 a m The sampling will resume again at 11 00 a m and continue until 1 30 p m It will pause until 4 0
108. Under Compatibility S 3700 Standard and C 3700 Compact 3 9 4 Suction Line Cumulative Error The sample accuracy is the greater of 10 of the sample volume or 20 ml and is repeatable to 10 ml Since samples of 200 ml can vary by 10 or 20 ml the cumulative error for four samples would be 80 ml If the sampler consis tently places an actual sample volume of 220 ml for each of the four samples the total volume held by the bottle would be 880 ml Again to avoid possible overfilling enter a bottle volume that is less than the actual bottle capacity You can use the Suction Line configure option to configure the sampler for the type vinyl or TEFLON diameter and length of the suction line used The volumetric delivery varies with line diameter type and length so it is important that you enter these settings accurately An incorrect setting will impair the accuracy of the sample volume These settings can also determine the number of post sample purge counts It is important to have suf ficient counts to completely clear the line If you change the current suction line settings the CALCU LATING PUMP TABLE VALUES message will appear for a short time Because the volumetric delivery of the sample varies with the diameter type and length of the suction line the sampler must revise the internal pump tables The electronic pump count uses the tables as reference for sample delivery There are three
109. W or RIGHT ARROW key at the SELECT OPTION display in the configure sequence you can scroll through the list of configure options without viewing each input display If you are interested in only one or two options you can use this method to locate the option of interest quickly Each option is discussed below in the order in which it appears when configuring the sampler Individual input displays and their settings are discussed separately within the discussion of each option The name of the setting is placed at the left of each option so you can identify each topic Each discussion does not include illustrations of displays however discussions do include display numbers which are identified in Appendix D 3 9 1 Set Clock Use this option to synchronize the sampler s clock with real time You must make entries using military time 9 30 a m would be entered as 9 30 9 30 p m would be entered as 21 30 etc When the sampler accepts a year entry the seconds will be reset to zero Display 210 3 9 2 Bottles and Sizes You can use the Bottles and Sizes option to enter the number of bottles and the bottle volume The option uses four input dis plays e The first display specifies a Portable or Refrigerated Sampler 3 38 3 9 3 Portable or Refrigerated Sampler 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines e The second display sets the number of bottles 1 4 12 or 24 for portable configurations The second di
110. With a time paced routine the 3700 will always take a sample automatically at the start time It will not take a sample at the stop time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Stop Time display of the Sampling Stops and Resumes configure option even if the stop time falls at a scheduled sample event time No sample will be taken at the resume time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Resume display of the Sampling Stops and Resumes option When you are using Stops and Resumes with flow paced rou tines the 3700 will not take a sample at the start time unless you have configured the sampler to do so in the Flow Mode Sam pling configure option With flow paced routines no sample will be taken at the stop time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Stop Time display of the Sampling Stops and Resumes option The 3700 will not take a sample at the resume time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Resume display of the Sampling Stops and Resumes option 3 11 Start Times This section discusses the sampler s start times It begins by out lining the sequence of events preceding the start time for most sampling routines 3 11 1 Events Preceding After programming you must start the sampling by pressing the Sampling Routine start sampling key Depending on the program and configure option settings the sampling routine may not start at soon as you press the key The Delay to Start
111. able 1 1 Technical Specifications for the 3700 Portable Samplers Continued Power Specifications Sampler Controller Power Requirement 12 VDC supplied by battery or AC power converter Sampler standby current 10 mA maximum Power Pack Requirement Use only Teledyne Isco made power packs certified by UL Part Number 60 1684 088 120 VAC 12 VAC 60 Hz 1 0 Amp Note This is the only version certified by UL The line cord mains connect cable is the Disconnect Device External Teledyne Isco Nickel Cad mium Battery Capacity 7 standard sampling programs 24 samples at a rate of one 200 ml sample per hour using 10 ft of 8 inch vinyl suction line at a 5 ft head External Teledyne Isco Lead Acid Battery Capacity 11 standard sampling programs 24 samples at a rate of one 200 ml sample per hour using 10 ft of 8 inch vinyl suction line at a 5 ft head Controller Internal 3V Lithium Bat tery Teledyne Isco 340 5000 00 Replace with same type 5 years minimum maintains internal logic and program settings Pump and Tubing Specifications Suction Tubing intake 3 to 99 foot lengths of 14 inch ID vinyl 8 inch ID vinyl 8 inch ID PTFE lined Suction Lift 26 feet 7 9 m maximum Pumping Rate at 3 feet of head Line Transport Velocity at 3 feet of head 14 inch ID suction tubing 3000 ml minute 3 g inch ID suction tubing 3500 ml minute 1 4 inch ID suctio
112. al of the Control Box If there is a problem with the sampler that requires you to ship your unit back to the factory it is often easiest to return only the control box for repair To remove the control box from the sampler 1 Disconnect the power source from the control box 2 Separate the center section from the sampler following the procedure described in Assembly and Disassembly of the Case in Section 2 3 Remove the suction tube from the pump and turn the center section over as shown in Figure 6 1 4 Unscrew the distributor arm retaining nut indicated in Figure 6 1 and pull the arm off the distributor shaft 5 Pull the pump tube out of the distributor arm and coil spring assembly and feed it out of the pump tube port in the center section 6 You can then remove the control box by unscrewing the six screws indicated in Figure 6 1 and lifting the center section off the control box 7 Screw the six screws and their lock washers into the con trol box to prevent losing them 8 Reattach the liquid detector lid and pump lid to prevent their loss M Note When you return the control box to the factory be sure to pack it securely Take special care to protect the distributor shaft Please include a detailed note explaining the problem 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing Pump Tube Port SE Distributor Arm TUS on Retaining Nut a y dj Hit Figure 6 1 Unscrewing the Control Box fro
113. amming Mode Sample Pacing and Distribution 3 59 3 11 Extended Programming Mode Sample Volume and Key Times 3 60 3 12 Extended Programming Mode STORM Programming 3 61 3700 Portable Samplers Table of Contents 3 13 Simplified Start Time Diagram 3 63 8 14 Start Time Diagram 3 65 3 15 Start Time Diagram for Nonuniform Time Routines 3 66 3 16 Storm Sampling Flow Pacing for the Second Bottle Group 3 72 3 17 Storm Sampling Time Pacing for the Second Bottle Group 3 73 3 18 Start Time Diagram for STORM Routines 3 79 4 1 Composite Sampling Float and Float Cage Installed on Center Section 4 2 4 2 6 pin Connector Diagram 4 4 4 3 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface 4 5 4 4 1640 Liquid Level Actuator 4 6 5 1 Interior of 3700 Standard Center Section View of the Pump Tube 5 5 5 2 Liquid Detector and Pump Housing 5 6 5 8 Interior of Liquid Detector and Pump Housing 5 6 5 4 Location of 10 Screws on Control Box Lid 5 10 5 5 Internal Desiccant controller lid removed 5 11 6 1 Unscrewi
114. ample volume has been delivered the display indicates the next sample bottle and the number of pulses remaining until the next sample event This series of displays will repeat until the last sample is taken at bottle 24 and the sampling routine is done This display informs you that the sampling routine is completed The number of sample events displays in the upper right corner The second line indicates the current time and date Example Checking the Configure Option Settings shows samples per bottle multiplexed sampling Samples are taken every 15 minutes Each bottle receives four sample volumes of 200 ml each so that bottles are switched every hour The sam pling routine is to start at 6 00 a m on the following day Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state PROGRAM 2 Access the program sequence by sel 3 Select TIME 4 Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry 5 Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 6 Select YES to set up the samples per bottle multiplexing 3 29 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling 7 Select SAMPLES PER BOTTLE 8 Enter 4 to s
115. and the ambient temperature of the sampling site The capacity of the 3700 Standard base is approximately 30 pounds of cubed ice when glass bottles are used and 10 pounds when plastic bottles are used The capacity for the 3700 Compact is 16 pounds For maximum cooling fill the base with bottles in place as well as the 3700 Standard s retaining ring with water and freeze the base and contents Insulation Both the center section and the base section have double walled construction with polyurethane foam insulation The insulation on both portable models has a standard thermal resistance factor of R 11 The suction line is the piece of tubing that extends from the sampler s pump tubing intake at the top of the liquid detector to the liquid source There are three standard suction lines available plasticized vinyl tubing in Y4 inch 0 64 cm or 3 8 inch 0 94 cm inside diameters IDs or FEP PTFE with a polyeth ylene cover in s inch ID The polyethylene cover over the 0 02 inch 0 051 cm wall PTFE line prevents the PTFE liner from kinking or collapsing in service and protects it from 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures damage The vinyl suction line contains a very low PPM parts per million level of phenols If this affects your samples use the PTFE suction line You can cut both vinyl and PTFE lines to any length from 3 to 99 feet in 1 foot increments Cut the suction line in whole foot incre ments le
116. artment for an appropriate interface device The 3700 Sampler can also be used with flow meters having other types of outputs for example a 4 to 20 mA output directly proportional to the flow rate However these flow meters require a special interface device to convert their output signal to one compatible with the 3700 sampler The 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface converts 4 to 20 mA output signals from both non Isco Flow meters and closed pipe flow meters to flow pulses acceptable to the 3700 Sampler Figure 4 3 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface 4 3 4 1640 Liquid Level Actuator The Liquid Level Actuator is an accessory that begins a sampling routine when the liquid level of the flow stream reaches a prede termined height The actuator inhibits sampling according to flow levels that is if the level of the flow stream falls below the actuator s probe the actuator will inhibit sampling until the level again rises to contact the probe 4 5 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment Figure 4 4 1640 Liquid Level Actuator 4 6 4 3 5 Master Slave Connections You can set the actuator to control the sampler in two modes Latch Mode The sampler continues the sampling routine even though the liquid level has receded and liquid no longer contacts the sensor Toggle Mode The sampler will halt the routine when the liquid ceases to contact the sensor To connect the actuator to the sampler
117. asic programming mode There are some exceptions however The extended mode modifies the sections of the program sequence to allow you to take advantage of the additional fea tures The Sample Pacing program section is extended to include settings for nonuniform times The Sample Distribution section is modified to let you program the sampler for multiple bottle 3 10 1 Extended Mode Sample Pacing 3 10 2 Extended Mode Sample Distribution 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines compositing The procedure and displays used to program the sampler for bottles per sample and samples per bottle multi plexing and sequential sampling are somewhat different The section is also extended to allow you to switch multiplexed bottles or bottle sets after programmed periods of time With the extended mode you can still switch bottles after a programmed number of samples have been deposited The Key Times section is extended to allow you to enter the time of the first bottle or bottle set change If you have enabled the Sampling Stops and Resumes configure option the Key Times section is extended to included displays for sampling stops and resumes Each of these extended features is discussed briefly below You may find it helpful to refer to Figures 3 10 3 11 and 3 12 which chart the program sequence in the extended mode In the extended programming mode the Sample Pacing section allows you to select flow pacing or one of tw
118. ator IC U21 IC U19 and a handful of discrete components are used to transmit serial information receive serial information and sense the presence of the externally connected device icing 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Serv Pa Pa LY Ri C4 ua ue ua
119. attach the actuator cable to the flow meter connector on the rear of the sampler Refer to the Liquid Level Actuator Instruction Manual provided with the actuator for additional information You can use the actuator with an Isco flow meter if you have the Y Connect Cable You must configure the sampler to respond to the actuator Infor mation configuring the sampler for use with the actuator can be found in the discussion of the Enable Pin configure option in Section 3 9 14 Using samplers in master slave configuration operates samplers in pairs while one sampler performs a sampling routine the other sampler awaits a command to begin sampling Installing two samplers as master and slave near manholes allows you to double the sampling capacity thereby reducing the number of visits to the manhole You must connect the samplers with the 3700 Master Slave to Flow Meter Cable Attach the cable to the flow meter connector on both samplers You must configure both sam plers in the master slave mode Enabling the master slave mode is discussed in following sections While the master sampler is performing a sampling routine it sends an inhibit signal out on pin D The slave sampler receiving the signal on pin F remains dormant until the master sampler completes its routine At this point the sampler reverses roles The master slave inhibit signal output and the bottle number 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment
120. ay require cutting the tube Attach the PTFE line to the pump tubing by inserting the line into the pump tubing and securing it with a suitable clamp Route the line from sampler to sampling point so that it is contin uously sloped downhill This helps to drain the suction line when the peristaltic pump reverses to purge the line and minimizes the possibility of cross contamination When the sampler is used in near freezing temperatures drain the suction line thoroughly to minimize the possibility of frozen liquid clogging the line The s inch ID vinyl suction lines are shipped from the factory with our standard weighted polypropylene strainer Figure 2 2 installed on one end of the suction line and a tubing coupling on the other end Additionally Teledyne Isco offers two low flow stainless steel strainers Figure 2 3 for 1 4 inch ID and inch ID suction lines For sampling from highly acidic flow streams a weighted CPVC plastic coated strainer is available Figure 2 4 The use of the strainer is optional When heavy suspended solids are involved and flow stream velocities are significant some field investigation results indicate that more representative samples are obtained without the strainer You can purchase bulk suction line without strainers Refer to the Accessories List in the back of this manual The strainer pre vents solid particles larger than a specific diameter from entering and clogging the suction line T
121. be and install the optional composite shut off float cage assembly With the portable com plete the preparation by the adding a composite sample con tainer and locating ring in the standard bottle base or an optional composite base With the compact remove the inner sleeve and install the proper bottle configuration for composite sampling These are the listed steps needed to convert the 3700 1 Separate the center section from the remainder of the sam pler 2 Remove the pump tube and distributor arm from the sam pler as described in Removing the Pump Tube Section 5 3 Turn the center section over as shown in Figure 4 1 and install the optional float and float cage You should install the shaft on the diving bell float in the hole in the distrib utor shaft as shown Attach the float cage to the underside of the center section using the four screws and the 1 inch spacers provided with the float cage kit When attaching the cage reuse the existing lockwash ers Be sure the float cage is oriented with the tube guide positioned as shown in Figure 4 1 The float and float cage direct the discharge of the sample into the composite con 4 1 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment 4 2 2 Standard Sample Bottle Tub 4 2 3 Optional Composite Tub tainer and provide a fail safe shut off to prevent accidental over filling of the composite container 4 Feed the 34 5 inch 88 5 cm composit
122. bles the sampler when the enable control condition is no longer satisfied Once a sampler running a storm routine has been disabled however it cannot be re enabled if control conditions are satisfied again You can prevent the sampler from being disabled by latching the sampler enable through the flow meter s control condition e The time between flow paced sample events exceeds the storm routine s maximum flow interval setting Manual Samples Manual sampling is not available during a storm routine If you press MANUAL SAMPLE during a storm routine the sampler will disregard the key Run State Displays Run state displays for storm routines are identical to displays used with conventional routines However the displays for the first and second bottle groups will alternate with each other Configure Option Display Number Recommended Setting Set Clock 210 Enter correct time and date Bottles and Sizes Portable Refrig 220 Select Portable for either the compact or standard 3700 sampler 2 4 8 12 24 222 Select 4 12 or 24 depending on your model bottle configu ration and base section Do not select 1 If the sampler is configured for one bottle composite sampling the storm branch is not accessible Bottle Volume 223 For 3700 Standard 4 bottles enter 3800 ml 24 plastic bottles enter 1000 ml 24 glass bottles enter 350 ml Suction Line 230 231 232 Enter correct settings Liquid Detector Liq
123. c graduated cylinder 1000 ml for sample volume calibration 299 0020 00 4 bottle Conversion Kit 60 3704 096 B 2 Bottles Caps and Retaining Rings Extra retaining ring for 24 polypropylene bottles 1000 ml 60 3703 058 Extra retaining ring for 24 glass bottles 350 ml 60 2703 011 Extra retaining ring for 12 one quart glass bottles 60 2703 011 Sample bottles 1000 ml polypropylene without caps case of 100 68 2100 008 Caps for 1000 ml polypropylene bottles with polyethylene foam liners case of 100 68 2100 010 B 1 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix B Accessories Sample bottles 350 ml glass without caps case of 100 Caps for 350 ml glass bottles with PTFE liners case of 100 1000 ml polypropylene sample bottles set of 24 with polyethylene foam lined caps 350 ml glass sample bottles set of 24 with PTFE lined caps 1 quart glass bottle for 12 bottle base section Lid for 1 quart glass bottle PTFE liner for 1 quart glass bottle lid 1 liter round polypropylene bottle with lid for 12 bottle base section
124. cates the pump counts elapsed since the last reset and the counts required to trigger the Pump Tubing Warning Exit this display by pressing any key Display 350 Tubing Life configure option After changing the pump tube select YES to reset the pump counter to zero Select NO to leave the counter unchanged Display 351 Tubing Life configure option Enter the number of pump counts required to trigger the pump count warning if the fac tory setting is not suitable This value is set to 500 000 when the controller is reinitialized Display 352 SOS Program Lock configure option Select ENABLE to turn on the program lock If you enable the program lock input displays are protected by a pass number 3700 The controller will not allow you to make any changes to a program or configure sequence setting until you enter the pass number when requested Select DISABLE to turn the pro gram lock off Display 360 Sampler ID configure option Enter the sampler identification here The sampler will accept as many as 10 characters including periods press resume sampling dashes press manual sample and spaces press start sampling Display 365 Run Diagnostics configure option Select YES to run the distributor test Select NO to skip the test Test the distrib utor by moving it to Position 24 then back to Position 1 Display 370 T Run
125. ce Contact Information Customer Service Phone 800 228 4373 USA Canada Mexico 402 464 0231 Outside North America Fax 402 465 3022 Email IscoCSR teledyne com Technical Support Phone Toll Free 866 298 6174 Samplers and Flow Meters Toll Free 800 775 2965 Syringe Pumps and Liquid Chromatography Email IscoService teledyne com Return equipment to 4700 Superior Street Lincoln NE 68504 1398 Other Correspondence Mail to P O Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 2531 Email IscoInfo teledyne com Revised September 2012 General Warnings Hazard Severity Levels location and application take heed in the following general warnings A WARNING This instrument has not been certified for use in hazardous locations as defined by the National Electrical Code WARNING Avoid hazardous practices If you use this instrument in any way not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired this will increase your risk of injury AVERTISSEMENT Eviter les usages p rilleux Si vous utilisez cet instrument d une mani re autre que celles qui sont specifi es dans ce manuel la protection fournie de l instrument peut tre affaiblie cela augmentera votre risque de blessure Additional safety information can be found in Appendix C This manual applies Hazard Severity Levels to the safety alerts p gt D n foun p gt R D D ta lt D n w la
126. clock times may skip a number of samples if disabled for long periods If the sampler is disabled and subsequently enabled it will initiate only one event to compensate for the skipped sample events even if several sample event times have been passed NOTE Nonuniform clock time programming is designed to replace flow pacing when a flow meter is not available at the site Before using a sampler programmed for nonuniform clock times with a flow meter be sure flow pacing is not a more appropriate application 3 11 3 Manual Sample Key The sampler will disregard the manual sample key during the and Programmed Start delay to start time and during the disable period The periods Times where the sampler disregards disable signals Delay to Start and the manual sample key when disabled appear in Figures 3 14 and 3 15 Start Time Delay Entries made in the Start Time Delay con figure option affect the start times The Start Time Delay section discusses this configure option Table 3 6 Start Time Displays Display 90 Display 310 Start Time Delay configure option Display 91 time paced sampling Display 92 flow paced sampling Display 93 storm paced sampling 3 64 START SAMPLING Delay to Start Time Determined by start time entry or start time delay e No Manual Samples e Disable Signal Ignored Sampler enabled at start time Sampler disab
127. cond bottle group Select DURING if you want the second bottle group filled during the same time period as the first bottle group Select AFTER to begin the flow pacing for the second bottle group after the sampler fills the first bottle group If you select DURING the sampler will begin counting flow pulses when it begins timing the delay to first group sample The sampler will take the first sample of the second bottle group as soon at it counts a full flow pulse interval If you select AFTER the sampler will begin counting flow pulses after the last sample event of the first bottle group Use Display 22 to enter the flow pulse interval for the second bottle group The third flow paced display allows you to enter the maximum flow interval The acceptable range of values for the maximum flow interval is one minute to 99 hours and 59 minutes The sampler will terminate the sampling routine when the amount of time between flow paced samples exceeds the limit set for the maximum flow interval The maximum flow interval will terminate the routine even if all bottles of either bottle group have not been filled Once the sampler terminates a routine the sampler cannot be reenabled by the flow meter should the flow meter detect enable control conditions again Note If the second bottle group requires flow paced samples the sampler may fill the second bottle group before it fills the first bottle group This can occur when
128. cond section It reports the number of bottles allocated for the second bottle group and the total volume of their combined capacity The sampler displays this information to help you enter the sample distribution scheme and sample volumes for the second bottle group If the remaining number of bottles or the capacity is not satisfactory reprogram the first section Pacing for the Second Bottle Group The next display Display 14 allows you to select time or flow pacing for the second bottle group Display 14 Depending on your selection the STORM sequence will follow one of the two paths shown for the second section in Figure 3 10 or 3 11 Time Pacing When you select TIME from Display 14 two time pacing displays 17 and 24 will follow JUTE f ay TO Display 17 Display 24 Use Display 17 to set the delay to the second bottle group Like the delay to the first group sample the delay to the second group sample determines the period between the time the sampler is enabled and the first sample is deposited in the second bottle group You can use this setting to fill the second bottle group during the same time the sampler fills the first bottle group or after the sampler fills the first bottle group Figure 3 17 shows a time diagram for a STORM routine that uses time pacing for both the first and second bottle groups To fill the second bottle group after the first be sure amount of time you enter for the delay
129. configure option to add the suction head setting to the program sequence The suction head display will appear after you enter the sample volume However when the head is unknown or variable omit the suc tion head setting by disabling that setting in the Liquid Detector configure option By disabling the setting you allow the liquid detector to determine the operating suc tion head each time a sample is taken Calibration Settings If you want to calibrate the sample volume you must enable the calibration option To enable this option select ENABLE in the Calibrate Sampler configure option Enabling the option will add the calibra tion displays to the Sample Volume Program section The calibration displays are shown in Example Calibration Enter the Key Times settings In the basic programming mode you will be asked if you want to enter a start time for the routine If you select YES you will be prompted to enter a specific start time and date If you select NO the sampler will use the start time delay The start time delay can be set from 0 to 9 999 minutes in the Start Time Delay configure option When you select NO the routine will start according to the delay setting in the Start Time Delay configure option The time remaining between the time you press the START SAMPLING key and the next full minute will pass before the delay countdown begins In other words with a start time delay of one minute if yo
130. ctor located on the rear of the sampler Closed pipe flow meters are connected to the sampler s Flow Meter port using the Teledyne Isco 4 20 mA Input Interface device see Appendix B Accessories Your sampler has an additional connector labeled PRINTER used to connect the sampler to an Isco Field Printer or laptop computer Both the flow meter connector and the printer con nector use the same 6 pin configuration The printer cable con nector accepts both the connector from the field printer and a cable from a field computer or a laptop computer running the Samplink software NM Note The Field Printer has been discontinued and is no longer sold by Teledyne Isco The 4200 Series Flow Meters 2100 Series Flow Modules and 4100 Series Flow Loggers and UniMag Closed Pipe Flow Meters are collectively called flow meters in this manual You can pur chase cables to connect the 3700 samplers to an Isco flow meter flow logger or 2100 series flow module Refer to the Accessories List for details To make the connection attach the appropriate cable connector to the flow meter according to directions in the flow meter in instruction manual attach the other connector to the 6 pin flow meter connector on the rear of the sampler If a connect cable is not attached to the flow meter or print con nectors be sure that the protective covers are tightly fastened in place 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equ
131. current bottle set The second line is used to indicate the number of flow pulses remaining until the sample event is initiated This display appears when the sample event is initiated It reports the sample number and the receiving bottle number on the first line during the pre sample purge When the pump begins to run forward to When the sample delivery has been completed for the first bottle of the set the distributor moves to the second bottle After the bottles of the set have each received a sample volume the alternating pair of displays reappear When the next sample event occurs this display reports the current sample event and the current bottle When the sample delivery is completed the distributor will move to the next bottle of the set and the following display will appear This cycle will be repeated as samples are deposited in the bottles of the set The sample number will increase with each sample deposited until the set change When the bottle sets are changed the sample event number is reset to one The bottle numbers of the new current set is reported 3 88 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Flow Paced Sampling Time Based Bottle Sets Continued The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done When the routine is completed this message appears I
132. d This display appears if you select TIME in Display 40 Enter the amount of time each bottle is to receive samples Display 42 This display appears if you select TIME in Display 41 Enter the amount of time each bottle set receives samples Display 43 This display appears after you select SAMPLES in Display 40 Enter the number of samples each bottle receives Display 44 This display appears after you select SAMPLES BTL in Display 41 Enter the number of samples each bottle set is to receive Display 45 LE This display appears when you select yes in Display 95 Enter the time of the first bottle switch The remaining bottle changes will occur according to settings entered in Display 42 The display will also appear if you have started the routine after the programmed switch time Display 46 This display appears when you select YES in Display 95 Enter the time of the first bottle set switch The remaining bottle set changes will occur according to settings entered in Display 43 The display will also appear if you start the routine after the programmed switch time Display 47 This display appears when the sampler is configured for 2 4 8 12 or 24 bottle configurations under uniform time flow or nonuniform time modes of sample pacing Select YES to sample continuously Select NO to stop the sam pli
133. d The micro processor then uses these counts to determine the pumped volume 202 203 204 Q201 Q202 R202 __ _ F R203 KOGA 208 209 210 OO Bais Se 1 21O O 212 i i D l 201 l Il I l K201 l l Figure 6 7 Optical Counter PCB Component Layout 6 12 6 4 Sample Event Cycle and Delivery of Sample Volumes 6 4 1 Volumetric Determination 6 4 2 Sample Delivery 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing The steps listed below describe a typical sequential sample event in order to help you determine the correct sequence of events in the cycle Should you suspect a malfunction in the delivery of the sample volumes you can use this information to help determine the point at which the problem occurs 1 A sample event is initiated 2 The distributor rotates to the position of the next sample bottle to be filled 3 The pump rotates in the reverse direction to air purge the suction line inlet of any accumulated debris 4 The pump direction changes pumping in the forward direction to fill the suction line 5 After the suction line has been filled to the pump inlet the sample volume measuring portion of the sampling cycle begins The pump rotates in the forward direction until the sample volume has been delivered 6 The pump direction again changes pumping in reverse to air purge the suction line to avoid cross contamination of samples The pump then shuts off 7 The sam
134. d Detector configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 240 Enter the number of retries the number of times the sampler will try to detect the presence of liquid for each sample event Display 243 D 7 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued Programming Mode configure option Select BASIC to use the basic programming mode To use the extended pro gramming mode select EXTENDED Display 250 Load Stored Program configure option Select the sampling program you want to use Select NONE to exit the dis play without loading a program Display 255 Save Current Program configure option Select the number with which you want to use to identify the current program when saved Select NONE to exit the display without saving a program Display 260 Flow Mode Sampling configure option This setting affects flow paced sampling routines Select YES to take the first sample at the start time NO to take the first sample at the end of the first flow pulse interval Display 270 Flow Mode Sampling configure option This setting affects flow paced time switched sampling routines only Select YES to take a sample at switch times Select NO if you do not want a sample event at the switch times Display 271 Nonuniform Time configure option S
135. d Sizes configure option This display appears when you have entered a bottle volume in Display 223 that exceeds a standard Teledyne Isco bottle size Display 224 Suction Line configure option Select 1 4 if you are using 4 inch suction line 98 if you are using g inch suction line Display 230 Suction Line configure option This display appears when you have selected Jg in Display 230 Select VINYL if you are using vinyl suction line PTFE if you are using PTFE suction line Display 231 Suction Line configure option Enter the length of the suction line Do not include the tube coupling or the strainer in the length measurement Display 232 Liquid Detector configure option Select ENABLE to turn on the Liquid Detector DISABLE to turn off the Liquid Detector If you turn off the detector you must enter the suction head Display 70 in the program sequence Display 240 Liquid Detector configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 240 Enter the number of rinse cycles Rinse cycles condition the suction line to reduce cross contamination Display 241 Liquid Detector configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 240 Select YES to add the suction head setting Display 70 to the program sequence Select NO to omit the setting Display 242 Liqui
136. d include the size of bottle ordered and the size type and length of suction line When you check the configuration settings be sure the settings match your equipment not the example Most program and configure settings can be reinitialized to factory settings if desired Table 3 4 lists the factory settings The Run Diagnostics section discusses the reinitialize option 3 19 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines STANDBY 9 50 34 12 SEP 04 Display 1 PROGRAM CONFIGURE TENTE Configure SAMPLER TD Program gt Sample Pacing Display 10 TIME FLOW PACED SAMPLING Display 21 NV Display 22 SAMPLE EVERY SAMPLE EVERY HOURS MINUTES PULSES 1 9999 AVA Sample Distribution Display 35 MULTIPLEX SAMPLES i yes IYES NO Cro Display 36 Bottles Per Sample BOTTLES PER SAMPLE Samples Per Bottle i SAMPLES PER BOTTLE Display 30 Display 31 BOTTLES PER SAMPLES PER i SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 BOTTLE 1 MAX Sample Volume WY Display 50 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF ml_ 1 MAX _ _ W _ _Display 70 r SUCTION HEAD OF See Liquid Detector configure option FEET 1 MAX Y Display 80 Pepi CALIBRATE SAMPLE See Example Calibration Procedure VOLUME YES NO Key Times NZ Display 90 ENTER START TIME lt D f Yes YES NO
137. d to fill the suction line up to the liquid detector 5 The sample volume measuring portion of the sampling cycle begins after liquid fills the suction line to the liquid detector The pump rotates forward until the programmed volume of liquid is delivered to the sample bottle In this manual the amount of liquid delivered to the bottle is referred to as the sample volume 6 The pump direction changes pumping in the reverse direc tion for the post sample purge Like the pre sample purge the post sample purge air purges the suction line After the post sample purge the pump shuts off 7 The sample interval resets and the cycle resumes at Step 1 The 3700 Sampler is principally designed to collect sequential discrete samples However you can program it to collect a number of other types of samples The 3700 Sampler has two pro gramming modes Basic and Extended The basic programming mode is used for conventional routines which include the types of sampling described in this section Section 3 3 discusses this in detail 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines You can characterize sample types by sample distribution and sample pacing Sample distribution is the order in which samples are placed in the bottles Sample pacing is the interval between samples 3 2 1 TypesofSample Pacing There are two types of sample pacing time pacing and flow pacing In time paced sampling the interval between samples
138. dealer should contact their Teledyne Isco dealer for warranty service Before returning any instrument for repair please call fax or e mail the Teledyne Isco Service Department for instructions Many problems can often be diagnosed and corrected over the phone or by e mail without returning the instrument to the factory Instruments needing factory repair should be packed carefully and shipped to the attention of the service department Small non fragile items can be sent by insured parcel post PLEASE BE SURE TO ENCLOSE A NOTE EXPLAINING THE PROBLEM Shipping Address Teledyne Isco Attention Repair Service 4700 Superior Street Lincoln NE 68504 USA Mailing Address Teledyne Isco PO Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 USA 800 775 2965 lab instruments 866 298 6174 samplers amp flow meters Sales amp General Information 800 228 4373 USA amp Canada Phone Repair service Fax 402 465 3001 Email February 28 2012 P N 60 1002 040 Rev G IscoService teledyne com Everywhereyoulook a TELEDYNE ISCO
139. display numbers are available in the Standby and Program states 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 12 18 14 15 16 17 18 19 Event No 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 80 30 30 45 45 45 Interval 6 intervals of 20 minutes 9 intervals of 30 minutes 3 intervals of 45 minutes Start Time Figure D 1 Time Line Table D 1 Display Index This display appears after you press the ENTER PROGRAM key while in standby Select PROGRAM to access the program sequence Select CONFIGURE to access the configure sequence Display 1 This informational display appears when you stop the pump with the STOP key after pressing the PUMP FORWARD key It reports the number of pump counts detected while the pump was in operation Exit this display by pressing any key except STOP and ON OFF Display 3 This informational display appears when you stop the pump with the STOP key after having pressed the PUMP REVERSE key It reports the number of pump counts detected while the pump was in operation Exit this display by pressing any key except STOP and ON OFF Display3 i This display appears after you select PROGRAM in Display 1 Select TIME for time paced sampling FLOW for flow paced sampling Display 10 D 1 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued This display appears only in the extended programming mode and follows Displa
140. dure from the beginning If the sampler s current program is correct restart the sampling routine Configuring and programming the sampler is as simple as responding to displays on the LCD with the keypad The sampler will prompt you through many of the entries by presenting a question or a choice on the display You must respond with the keypad The LCD and the keypad are located on the 3700 Sampler control panel The following section summarizes each key s function The section Displays discusses LCD displays and ways you can use the keypad to interact with the sampler Keys are grouped together on the control panel to assist you in identifying related functions Control keys manually control the sampler numeric keys are used to enter program values pro gramming keys are used to monitor the sampler s status and direct programming activities Key names are represented by small capital letters in this manual 3 13 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines The individual key switches that make up the keypad provide tactile and audible feedback to assure you that the key switch has been successfully actuated When you press a key switch you can feel the deflection of the spring member in the switch an audio indicator inside the sampler will beep once The sampler has a 10 keystroke buffer which in some cases allows you to type ahead of the display ISCO 3700 Sampler Programming Instructions
141. e a Be LE a 3 2 3 2 1 Types of Sample Pacing 3 3 3 2 2 Types of Sample Distribution 3 3 3 3 Types of Sampling Available in Extended Programming Mode 3 6 3 3 1 Nonuniform Time Intervals 3 6 3 3 2 Extended Multiplexing 3 6 3 3 3 Multiple Bottle Compositing 3 7 3 3 4 Stops and Resumes 3 7 3 4 Stormwater Sampling 3 7 3 4 1 Storm Event Sample Distribution Schemes 3 8 8 5 Programming Introduction 3 8 3 5 1 Operating States i vinee Liens PE ARE ANNE Lie Etes 3 8 3 5 2 Programming Modes 3 9 8 5 8 Configure Sequence 3 12 8 6 Programming Procedure 3 12 3 6 1 Following Display Cues 3 13 3 6 2 Keypad Description 3 13 3 6 3 Displays ss re sa ne Rd eal Ga Pan Gt ta Gok AS 3 16 3 7 Programming Examples 3 18 3 8 Basic Programming Procedure 3 21 3 9 Configure S quence i z erreen fernandel te eens Shed
142. e at all Remember that the nose fails too when it comes to sensing dan gerous concentrations of HS Various other toxic gases have been mentioned in some publica tions It is unlikely that any person has been asphyxiated in a sewer by any of those other gases except possibly chlorine The vapor of gasoline and other hydrocarbons is sometimes present in amounts that could cause discomfort and illness but under that condition the explosion hazard would be far more serious The explosimeter tests as well as the sense of smell would warn of the danger Pipelines in chemical plants might contain any C 5 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures C 3 Hazardous Gases number of harmful vapors They too are sensed by smell and explosimeter tests if they get into the public sewer Such occur rences are rare The attempt to instill a sense of urgency about real hazards is diluted if a man is told to give attention to a long list of things that in fact are irrelevant Be very careful to avoid high HS concentrations flammable atmospheres and hazards of physical injuries Remember that much HS may be released by the stirring up of sludge in the bottom of a structure Obey your senses in respect to irritating gases such as chlorine unconsciousness comes suddenly from breathing too much Be cautious about strange odors Do not determine percent oxygen in the air There is a danger that the result will
143. e configure sequence pro vides a number of setup options Some configure options provide equipment specifications bottle sizes suction line diameters and lengths and so on For example the 3700 Standard can use dif ferent sized sequential bottles 350 ml and 1000 ml You must enter the correct bottle size so that the sampler can calculate the range of sample volumes for a given number of samples and prevent overfilling Other options allow you to set the sampler s real time clock calibrate the sampler or enable the password program protection The configure sequence also allows you to select either of the pro gramming modes basic or extended Basic Programming Use the basic programming mode for conventional sampling routines In the basic programming mode you can take sequential or composite samples at uniform time intervals or at flow pulse intervals You can multiplex samples if desired both bottles per sample and samples per bottle multi plexing are available You can control the start time of the routine by entering a specific time and date or with the adjustable start time delay Extended Programming The extended programming mode increases the number of available features making more complex sampling routines possible For example you can use nonuniform time intervals and create an intermittent sampling schedule with the Stops and Resumes feature Although all basic programming features are available in the extended p
144. e control box The 24 position keypad is used to enter program parameters and direct the following controls on off pump reverse pump forward stop the pump start sampling resume sampling display the operating status and move the distributor arm to the next bottle The 3700 Compact is a modular system that is custom configured for the user It includes a universal compact insulated base the inner sleeve with a choice of five bottle configurations the standard 3700 controller and a top cover The external com ponent materials control panel display and keypad are the same as that of the 3700 Portable The 3700 Compact is designed for durability and carrying ease In addition its sturdy latches and handles the base section of the unit has finger grips molded into the plastic to make it easier to carry At its heaviest with a 24 bottle sleeve inside the unit weighs only 62 pounds An intuitive user interface lets you easily program the 3700s for both simple and complex sampling schemes The LCD prompts you through the programming process by presenting a choice or a question on the LCD To program the 3700s you merely respond to displayed prompts with the keypad Two programming modes basic and extended are standard with the 3700 Series 1 2 1 Flexible Sampling Intervals 1 2 2 Multiplexing 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction The basic programming mode allows you to set up typical sam pling r
145. e dis tributor measure pump counts and so on A 24 position keypad connected at P5 directs the micropro cessor through the program Many discrete components along with IC U11 are used to decode pressed keys All user originated instructions enter the system through the keypad The 3700 Sampler is supplied with a liquid detection system that gives it the ability to accurately deliver specified sample volumes The liquid detection system consists of a piezoelectric sensor and filtering circuitry The sensor mounted on the exterior of the control box produces a signal proportional to an induced strain on the pump tubing This signal is routed through P8 to IC U15 and its associated circuitry where it is massaged into a YES or NO indication of liquid presence IC U15 the main circuit component of the detection system contains a switched capacitor low pass filter and two Op Amps A collection of transistors resistors and diodes are used to control the dis tributor motor The motor control circuitry connects to the dis tributor through P6 and can drive the distributor in either direction As the distributor moves its position is monitored by an optical device mounted on the distributor assembly IC U20 supplies the necessary current for the optical device An RS 232 serial communications port is connected to the system at P9 This port is used to output sampler status program set tings and sampling results to a printer or an interrog
146. e first line of this display indicates the number of the upcoming sample event and the total number of programmed samples The second line indicates the scheduled time of the upcoming event followed by the current time When the time to the next sample even cycle begins initiated the sample event the sampling When the pump reverses for the pre sample purge the second line disappears At the end of the pre sample purge the pump runs forward to deliver the sample and the second line appears on the display This display remains through the end of the post sample purge corner reports the current time At the end of the sample event the display changes to indicate the number and time of the next event The lower right This display appears when the routine is sample events and the current time and date complete It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of 3 36 Example Calibration shows how to calibrate the sampler for a 200 ml sample volume You must enable the Calibrate Sampler configure option in the configure sequence before the calibration displays shown below appear Even without calibrating the 3700 Sampler delivers accurate sample volumes If your sample volumes vary significantly with the entered values check the suction line first Be sure the line slopes continuously downhill and is draining completely after
147. e option sets the number of pump counts needed to trigger the Replace Pump Tubing warning The warning is activated when the pump count reaches the entered value and only appears after you press DISPLAY STATUS You must reset the pump counter after replacing the pump tubing If you consis tently experience a tubing failure at a pump count that differs significantly from the current setting enter that value here The factory set value of 500 000 pump counts will deliver approxi mately 500 samples of 200 ml each using a s inch by 10 foot vinyl suction line at a 5 foot suction head Display 350 351 and 352 Select ENABLE to turn the lock on When the Program Lock is enabled each protected display can be viewed but no values can be changed without first entering the pass number 3700 Once the pass number has been entered you can change any value or setting in either the program or configure sequence Display 360 The Sampler ID option allows you to enter a 10 character identi fication number ID for the sampler The ID number is used to identify sampling reports produced by the Teledyne Isco Field Printer and in files created by Samplink The sampler is shipped from the factory with 10 dashes entered for the ID Display 365 Acceptable Characters The ID field will accept digits dashes spaces and periods You can enter spaces dashes and periods with three of the control keys Enter a space with the START
148. e pump tube sup plied with the optional float and float cage through the port in the center section Then place it in the float cage tube guide as shown in Figure 4 1 and install it in the pump as described in Installing a New Pump Tube Section 5 8 3 You can collect composite samples in the 8700 Standard s sample bottle base equipped with either a 2 5 gallon glass or polyeth ylene plastic container or by inserting either type of container in the 3700 Compact s base These containers are available as options for the samplers If you intend to use the 2 5 gallon composite sample containers in the standard sample bottle tub you must have the standard base composite bottle locating deck with the 3700 Standard Installing the Deck in the 3700 Standard Prepare the standard bottle base by first removing the retaining ring and sample bottles Then place the locating deck open side down in the bottom of the sample bottle tub The locating deck has two recessed areas the deeper recess locates the glass container the shallower recess locates the plastic bottle Finally place the desired sample container on the locating deck and re assemble the sampler The 3700 Standard has two sizes of composite containers 2 5 gallon and 4 gallon The 2 5 gallon containers are used with the sequential bottle base and a locating ring The 4 gallon wide mouth composite container requires the optional composite tub Like the standard tub the com
149. e reassembled by reversing these steps Ensure that you replace all of the hardware and secure the grounding straps 7 Phillips Head Screws 4 Nut and Grounding Strap Disconnect 5 connectors Shield Figure 6 2 Underside of the Control Box Cover 6 4 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing gt Hex Threaded Standoff 4 Phillips Head Screw j Figure 6 3 Main Circuit Board DANGER Danger of explosion if the lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace with same battery type Teledyne Isco Part 340 5000 000 Ensure correct polarity Do not dispose of used lithium battery in fire 6 1 5 Removal of the The distributor gear case assembly is located in the lower section Distributor Gear Case of the control box To gain access to the lower section of the Assembly control box follow the instructions in the Access to Electronic Components section Follow the steps below to gain access to these and other components in the lower section of the control box 1 Disconnect power from the unit 2 Remove the 2 nuts and the screw shown in Figure 6 4 Remove the ground strap by removing the remaining screw 3 Lift the plastic tray straight up out of the control box 4 The distributor gear case can be removed from the control box by removing the four screws and the ground straps shown in Figure 6 5 The distributor gear case can be reinstalled by reversing these steps Ensure that you rep
150. e sampler begins to count flow pulses This display indicates the bottles that will receive sample volumes at the upcoming sample event If the bottle set consisted of four bottles the first line of the display would read BOTTLES 1 to 4 The second line displays the number of flow pulses remaining until the sample event This display shows one pulse remaining until the sample event When the sampler receives the tenth pulse the first line reports the current bottle number When the pump begins to run forward to deliver the sample volume the second line appears After the pump com pletes the sample delivery it reverses to purge the liquid from the pump tube past the liquid detector The suction line is not completely purged instead the liquid is pumped just past the liquid detector At the end of the pump tube purge the distributor moves to the next bottle of the set The display remains unchanged until the distributor relocates to the next bottle of the set When the distributor relocates above the next bottle the bottle number reported in the display changes to indicate the bottle number The message PUMPING 500 nil will remain on the display When the distributor reaches the correct position over the second bottle the pump delivers the sample volume When the delivery is done the pump reverses to complete the post sample purge At the end of the post sa
151. e sampler will take a sample every fifth flow pulse received 4 Enter 5 as the flow pulse interval T IL 5 Select NO 6 Enter 500 to set the sample volume at 500 ml 7 Select NO After this message displays briefly the sampler automatically returns to the standby state run the program 8 After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPLING key to 9 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle press the ENTER PROGRAM key To start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here he current time and date The first line of this display indicates the start time The second line reports t receive a sample at the next sample event The second line indicates the This display indicates the bottle that will number of pulses remaining in the sample ntdown continues until the sample event This display shows that one flow pulse concludes 3 28 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Flow Paced Sequential Sampling Continued The second line of the display will disappear as the sampler begins the pre sample purge m This display appears when the pump begins to run in the forward direction to deliver the sample volume It remains through the end of the post sample purge When the first s
152. e sampling program requires one bottle per sample event Indicates the bottle number of the next sequential sample The second line reports the number of flow pulses remaining until the next sample event Indicates the bottles that will receive samples at the next sample event The second line reports the pulses remaining until the next sample event The sampling program requires three bottles per sample event Indicates the number of the upcoming sample the total number of samples each bottle is to receive and the current bottle number This display indicates that four samples are to be deposited in each bottle Indicates the sample and bottle numbers of the next sample event The bottle set consists of four bottles The sampling program requires that four samples be placed in each bottle of the set Indicates the sample and bottle number of the next sample event The sampling program requires that you use one bottle per sample event and that you switch the bottles on a time basis Alternates with the display illustrated in item 8 at 3 second intervals Indicates the time of the next bottle switch Indicates the time of the next bottle switch Indicates the time of the next bottle set switch Indicates a sample in progress 3 108 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Run State Displays Co
153. e signals to the sampler A sampler receiving a disable signal will suspend the sampling routine until it receives an enable signal The sampler will disregard a disable signal it receives from a flow meter during the delay to start time If the sampler is dis abled when the start time occurs it will suspend the routine until it is enabled Once enabled the sampler will begin the time or flow intervals The sampler will initiate a sample event when enabled for all time paced routines For flow paced routines it will initiate a sample event when the sampler is configured to take a sample upon enable in the Enable Pin configure option If the sampler is enabled when the start time occurs it will begin the routine The sampler will initiate a sample event at the start time for all time paced routines It will initiate a sample event at 3 63 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines the start time for flow paced routines when configured for sample at start time in the Flow Mode configure option Refer to Figure 3 14 The diagram shows the sampler s response when enabled or disabled at the start time for most basic and extended mode routines 3 11 2 Nonuniform Times Figure 3 15 diagrams the sequence of events preceding a routine and Disable Signals programmed for nonuniform clock times Nonuniform clock time programming allows you to enter a specific time and date for each sample event Samplers programmed with nonuniform
154. early you can sample until the bottle switches are placed on schedule to avoid missing any samples If you do not enter a first switch time the sampler will begin timing the switch interval from the start time for the routine and the first bottle or bottle set will receive samples for the full time period Switch times are not available in STORM routines 3 58 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines SAMPLER PROGRAM CONFIGURE L C Configure x o Configure Sequence Program gt Sample Pacing NZ Display 12 TIME FLOW STORM Sum 5 PACED SAMPLING To STORM branch Fow Display 11 Nv Display 22 UNIFORM NONUNIFORM p x SAMPLE EVERY onion Tine TIME INTERVALS PULSES 1 9999 Display 21 Display 20 SAMPLE EVERY Yes MODIFY SEQUENCE No HOURS MINUTES YES NO Display 25 TAKE SAMPLES 1 MAX Clock Time Minutes Display 26 NZ Display 27 TAKE SAMPLES AT QUANTITY AT INTERVAL 1 HH MM DD MM 1 AT MINUTES ap N7 NZ AA Sample Distribution Display 50 13 or more Bottles Per BOTTLES PER Sample Event One Bottle Set k SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 More Than One Bottle Per Sample Event More Than One Bottle Set
155. efining sampling stop and resume times You can enter as many as 12 stop and 12 resume times Time Pacing Extended Samples taken at regular time intervals from 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes STORM Programming Available through the Extended Mode Only Storm Pacing Compositing Flow Pacing Extended Samples taken at regular flow intervals The sampler will totalize flow intervals of 1 to 9 999 pulses Storm Distribution Sequential Extended One sample volume placed in each bottle Samples per Bottle Extended More than one sample volume placed in each bottle You can Multiplexing switch bottles after a specified number of samples have been deposited Bottles per Sample Extended Sample volumes placed in more than one bottle at each sample Multiplexing event Multiple Bottle Extended More than one sample volume placed in a set of bottles You can switch bottle sets after a specified number of samples have been deposited Storm Volumes and Accuracy Sample Sample Volume Extended Enter volumes from 10 to 990 ml for the time paced and flow paced segments separately Suction Head Extended You can enter suction heads from 1 to 20 feet Calibration Extended Calibrate sample volumes if desired Sets calibration using the timed sample volume only Storm Key Times Delay to First Group Sam Extended Enter a time of up to 99 minutes to delay the first sample delivered
156. elect CLOCK TIME to enter the nonuniform time intervals as clock times Dis play 26 Select MINUTES to set the nonuniform intervals in minutes Display 27 Display 280 Calibrate Sampler configure option Select ENABLE to add calibration displays to the program sequence Select DISABLE to omit the calibration displays Display 290 Sampling Stop Resume configure option Select ENABLE to add the Sampling Stop Resume settings to the pro gram sequence Select DISABLE to omit the settings Display 300 Sampling Stop Resume configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 300 Select YES to take a sample at stop times Select NO if you do not want a sample event at the stop times Display 301 Sampling Stop Resume configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 300 Select YES to take a sample at the resume times Select NO if you do not want a sample event at the resume times Display 302 5 Start Time Delay configure option Enter the amount of time in minutes you want to delay the start time This entry affects programs that do not have a programmed start time Display 310 D 8 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued Enable Pin configure option Select YES to turn t
157. eledyne Isco recom mends its use for bottom sampling or sampling from streams con taining large solids The 4 inch strainers supplied for use with the 4 inch ID suction line have 1 64 inch 0 56 cm diameter holes The s inch strainers supplied for use with the vinyl or PTFE s inch ID suction line have 7 64 inch 0 9 cm diameter holes Figure 2 2 Standard Weighted Polypropylene Strainer 2 4 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures Figure 2 3 Stainless Steel Strainer Figure 2 4 CPVC Weighted Strainer 2 5 1 Intake Placement The proper placement of the sampler intake assures the col lection of representative samples Place the intake in the main flow not in an eddy or at the edge of flow The vertical position of the intake in the flow is important An intake at the bottom may result in excess heavy solids and no floating materials while placement at the top may result in the opposite The suction line tends to float in deep flow streams dislodging the line and strainer The following chart shows the maximum depths you can submerge the lines and strainers without risks of flotation At depths exceeding the safe depths anchor the line and strainer securely Table 2 1 Strainers Vinyl Vinyl PTFE 14 inch 6 mm 8 inch 9 mm 8 inch 9 mm Standard Weighted 22 feet 6 7 m 15 feet 4 5 m Strainer Polypropylene Stainless Steel 14 feet 4 3m 22 feet 6 7 m 15 feet 4 5 m Lo
158. en entered previously 4 Entering Manholes Since the top of the manhole is usually flush with the surrounding surface there may not be anything for the person who is entering the manhole to grab on to steady himself Persons who are entering manholes should not be per mitted to carry anything in their hands as they enter the manhole to ensure that their hands will be free to hold on or grab if they slip A good method for entering a manhole is to sit on the surface facing the manhole steps or ladder with the feet in the hole and the arms straddling the opening for support As the body slides forward and downward the feet can engage a rung and the back can rest against the opposite side of the opening If there is any doubt about the soundness of the manhole steps a portable ladder should be used A person should never enter a manhole unless he is wearing per sonal safety equipment including a safety harness and a hard hat Two persons should be stationed at the surface continuously while anyone is working inside a manhole to lift him out if he is overcome or injured One man cannot lift an unconscious man out of a manhole The persons stationed at the surface should 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures also function as guards to keep people and vehicles away from the manhole opening To avoid a serious injury a person should not be lifted out of a manhole by his arm unless it is a dire emer gency
159. en slightly bent at the knees 8 Other Precautions Other precautions which should be taken when entering a manhole are e Wear a hard hat e Wear coveralls or removable outer garment that can be readily removed when the work is completed e Wear boots or nonsparking safety shoes e Wear rubberized or waterproof gloves e Wear a safety harness with a stout rope attached e Do not smoke e Avoid touching yourself above the collar until you have cleaned your hands 9 Emergencies Every member of the crew should be instructed on procedures to be followed in cases of an emergency It is the duty of each crew chief to have a list of emergency phone numbers including the nearest hospital and ambulance service police precinct fire station and rescue or general emergency number C 3 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures C 2 Lethal Atmospheres in C 4 Sewers 10 Field Equipment The following equipment will be available for use Blowers Gloves Traffic cones Breathing apparatus Hard Hats Coveralls Harnesses First aid kits Manhole irons Emergency flashers Pick axes Flashlights Rain slickers Mirrors Ropes Gas detectors Safety vests Gas masks Waders The following is an article written by Dr Richard D Pomeroy and published in the October 1980 issue of Deeds amp Data of the WPCE Dr Pomeroy is particularly well known for his studies over a period of nearly 50 years in the fie
160. en filled or after the programmed number of samples have been placed in the composite container or composite sam pling has been stopped by the float shut off When the sampling routine has finished the display will read DONE 2 7 1 Connection to a Flow Meter 2 7 2 Saving Program Settings 2 8 Recovering the Sampler 2 8 1 Exchanging Sampler Tubs 2 8 2 Restarting 2 9 Sampler Locking 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures Section 4 3 discusses connecting the sampler to Teledyne Isco and non Isco Flow meters If there is not a connect cable attached to the flow meter connector on the side of the sampler be sure that the protective cap is tightly screwed in place to maintain the water tightness of the unit You can program the sampler for automatic operation Because the lithium battery maintains the program settings you can easily program the sampler in the office or the lab take it into the field and place it into operation To start the sampling program press the start sampling key located on the control panel When you recover the sampler keep it level to prevent spilling the collected samples If you must return the entire sampler to the laboratory or office disconnect the cable from the flow meter if used You can turn off the sampler but this is not necessary Separate the base section from the center section as described previously and install caps on the bottles The sampler is now read
161. ent The bottle number signal consists of a number of 100 millisecond 12 volt pulses that equal the bottle number i e four pulses rep resent bottle 4 20 pulses represent bottle 20 The type of signal selected from the Event Mark configure option affects the event mark signal on pin E In Figure 3 9A a pulse signal is sent at the beginning of the pre sample purge In Figure 3 9B a pulse signal is sent during the sample volume delivery portion of the sample event In Figure 3 9C a continuous signal is sent during the entire pump cycle In Figure 3 9D a con tinuous pulse is sent for the duration of the sample volume delivery 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Pre sample Purge Rinse Cycle Pump Volume 1 Pump Volume 2 Pump Volume 3 Post sample Purge Event Mark Bottle Number i i i i Event Mark Bottle Number Event Mark Bottle Number ign Event Mark Bottle Number D Continuous During Forward Pumping Only Figure 3 9 Event Mark and Bottle Number Signal Output Continuous Pulse Signal The Continuous Pulse setting selects either continuous or pulse signals Pulse signals are three seconds in duration continuous signals are three seconds or longer and depend on the setting and the pump cycle Display 330 Continuous Signal Timing The Pump Cycle Fwd Pumping settings will appear when you have selected CONTINUOUS SIGNAL Select PUMP CYCLE when you want a continuous
162. ep affected person warm and at rest Get medical attention immediately First Aid Ingestion If large amounts have been ingested give emetics to cause vomiting Stomach siphon may be applied as well Milk and fatty acids should be avoided Get medical attention immediately First Aid Eyes Wash eyes immediately and carefully for 30 minutes with running water G 3 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets 101 Christine Drive Belen New Mexico 87002 Phone 505 864 6691 neo PEU CAES Fax 505 861 2355 j ISO 9002 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET September 28 1998 SORB IT Packaged Desiccant NOTE TO PHYSICIAN This product is a desiccant and generates heat as it adsorbs water The used product can contain material of hazardous nature Identify that material and treat accordingly SECTION VI REACTIVITY DATA Reactivity Silica gel is stable under normal temperatures and pressures in sealed containers Moisture can cause a rise in temperature which may result in a burn SECTION VII SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES Notify safety personnel of spills or leaks Clean up personnel need protection against inhalation of dusts or fumes Eye protection is required Vacuuming and or wet methods of cleanup are preferred Place in appropriate containers for disposal keeping airborne particulates at a minimum SECTION VIII SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION Respiratory Protection Provide a NIOSH MS
163. er of bottles per sample event to 1 3 82 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling 8 Select SAMPLES We recommend bottle set changes be based on samples for time paced sampling routines 9 Enter 4 to set the number of samples per bottle to 4 10 Enter 75 to set the sample volume at 75 ml 11 Select NO 12 After the sampler is properly installed press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 13 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here This display is used with samples per bottle multiplexing The first line indicate the number of the upcoming sample and the total number of samples each bottle is to receive It also indicates the current bottle number Thus this display indicates that the upcoming sample is the first of four samples and bottle one is to receive the next sample The second line indicates the scheduled time of the sample The current time is shown in the right corner as the sampler counts down to the next sample event time When the scheduled sample event time arrives the second line will disappear while the sampler completes the pre sample purge
164. erformance Packaging ISO 9002 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET September 28 1998 SORB IT Packaged Desiccant SECTION I PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION Trade Name and Synonyms Silica Gel Synthetic Amorphous Silica Silicon Dioxide Chemical Family Synthetic Amorphous Silica Formula SiO2 x H20 SECTION Il HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS Components in the Solid Mixture COMPONENT CAS No ACGIH TLV PPM OSHA PEL Amorphous 63231 67 4 gt 99 PEL 20 RESPIRABLE LIMIT NONE Silica TLV 5 HAZARD IRRITANT Synthetic amorphous silica is not to be confused with crystalline silica such as quartz cristobalite or tridymite or with diatomaceous earth or other naturally occurring forms of amorphous silica that frequently contain crystalline forms This product is in granular form and packed in bags for use as a desiccant Therefore no exposure to the product is anticipated under normal use of this product Avoid inhaling desiccant dust SECTION Ill PHYSICAL DATA Appearance and Odor White granules odorless Melting Point gt 1600 Deg C gt 2900 Deg F Solubility in Water Insoluble Bulk Density gt 40 lbs cu ft Percent Volatile by Weight 1750 Deg F lt 10 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets 101 Christine Drive Belen New Mexico 87002 UD HEMIE Que _ Bibid oida A a Done enr Cheat rs alse Fax 5
165. ering with the controls and sample bottles the sampler can be locked with the locking cable accessory package For standard size 3700 Samplers use P N 68 6700 134 use P N 68 6700 111 for 3700 Compact Sampler The sampler is secured with three stainless steel cables and a padlock To secure the sampler place the hook on the end of the cable through the hole on the latch as shown in Figure 2 6 Repeat this with the other 2 7 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures two cables and gather the ends of the cables with the small loops at the center of the top cover Then feed the padlock through the loops and lock as shown in Figure 2 7 Figure 2 6 Locking the Sampler 2 8 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures Figure 2 7 Locked Sampler 2 9 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures 2 10 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines This section discusses in detail the sampling features of the 3700 Portable Samplers and the procedures for programming your sampler Teledyne Isco has found that the most effective way to learn to program the 3700 Sampler is to read this section with a sampler in front of you The time that you spend in the office or laboratory actually programming the sampler and observing its operation is usually time well spent If you are already familiar with the sampling capabilities of the 3700 Sampler you may prefer
166. eriod is then calculated 2 500 000 GAL 50 000 GAL SAMPLES 50 SAMPLES Thus based on an average flow of 2 5 MGD 50 samples will be collected Calculation of Sample Volume To calculate the volume of each individual sample the volume of the composite sample con tainer being used and the total number of samples to be collected calculated above must be known The individual sample volume is calculated by simply dividing the volume of the composite sample container being used by the total number of samples to be collected For example assume that a 2 5 gallon 9 400 ml plastic container is being used and that a total of 50 samples are to be collected in it The individual sample volume is then calcu lated 9400 ML 50 SAMPLES 188 ML 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix E Calculating Flow Increment Between Samples Sample Volume Considerations Thus a sample volume of 188 ml will result in the desired composite sample Because of the basic uncertainty of the delivered sample volume exactly matching the programmed nominal sample volume and the 10 ml sample repeatability it is good practice to select a nominal sample volume which is slightly smaller than the calculated sample volume This is to prevent overfilling of the sample con tainer In the example an individual nominal sample volume of 125 ml might be a prudent choice For critical applications cali bration of the sample volume can be used It is important to select an
167. es C 6 Appendix D Display Index Appendix E Calculating Flow Increment Between Samples Appendix F Glossary Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets List of Figures 2 1 Attaching the suction line to the pump tubing 2 3 2 2 Standard Weighted Polypropylene Strainer 2 4 2 3 Stainless Steel Strainer 2 5 2 4 CPVC Weighted Strainer 2 5 2 5 Placement of the Sampler Adjacent to Manhole 2 6 2 6 Locking the Sampler 2 8 2 7 Locked Sampler 2 9 3 1 Sequential Sample Distribution 3 3 3 2 Samples Per Bottle Multiplexing 3 5 3 3 Bottles Per Sample Multiplexing 3 5 3 4 Multiple Bottle Compositing 3 7 3 5 Storm Distribution Scheme 3 8 3 6 Interactive State Structure 3 10 3 7 3100 Control Panels aena 00e ut ne Ye Alias Behe eek EE 3 14 3 8 Basic Programming Mode Program Sequence Structure 3 20 3 9 Event Mark and Bottle Number Signal Output 3 51 8 10 Progr
168. es at regular time intervals a sample every 15 minutes for example You can set the interval between samples from 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes in 1 minute increments Using the extended pro gramming mode you can specify as many as 999 or bottle volume dependent nonuniform time intervals in minutes For example you can program the sampler to take the first six samples at 10 minute intervals then four more samples at 15 minute intervals and so on Users can set nonuniform time intervals from 1 to 999 minutes in 1 minute intervals You can specify nonuniform times in a clock time format by entering a time and date for each sample The sampler will accept as many as 99 nonuniform clock times Additionally the Sampling Stop and Resume feature allows you to create an intermittent sampling schedule With this extended programming feature you can sample only during key periods of the day For example you may wish to sample only during the hours of 6 a m to 8 a m and 5 p m to 7 p m You can enter as many as 12 sampling stops and 12 resumes You can use sam pling stops and resumes with both flow and time paced routines and with uniform and nonuniform time intervals In addition to sequential sampling which places one sample in each bottle the sampler provides three standard types of multi plexed sample distribution samples per bottle multiplexing bottles per sample multiplexing and multiple bottle compos iting 1 3 3700 Po
169. es of the Power Products Guide by contacting Teledyne Isco s Customer Service Department at 800 228 4373 in the U S A CAUTION Most Teledyne Isco accessories and interfacing equipment are not certified for use in Hazardous Locations as defined by the National Electrical Code Never operate equipment in haz ardous locations that has not been certified as safe for such use The Teledyne Isco 2151 and 2151P Area Velocity Flow Mod ules are certified intrinsically safe for installation in Class Division 1 Groups C and D hazardous locations A full line of accessories and interfacing equipment is available to help you adapt the sampler to your specific application some of the more common items are briefly discussed below Other accessories are noted throughout this manual where appro priate You will find a full list of accessories in Appendix B The 4200 Series Flow Meters 2100 Series Flow Modules and 4100 Series Flow Loggers and UniMag Closed Pipe Flow Meters are collectively called flow meters in this manual The 3700 Series will accept flow pulses from all Isco Flow meters for flow paced sampling Isco Flow meters and flow loggers are equipped with a sampler enable feature The 4200 Series Flow Meters and 4100 Series Flow Loggers can inhibit a 3700 until the level of the flow stream reaches a predetermined height or set point When the flow stream reaches that height the flow meter enables the sampler and s
170. ess the manual sample will be counted as one of the programmed samples When entering a sampler ID this key will type a dash e NEXT BOTTLE If you want to reposition the distributor use the NEXT BOTTLE key The sampler will advance the distributor to the next bottle position The sampler determines the bottle positions by referring to the Bottle Number configuration setting The sampler will display the distributor s location as illustrated in g After a short time the display will revert to standby If 3 15 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines the distributor is over the last bottle position when you press next bottle the distributor will move to Bottle 1 Program Keys The four program keys are used to enter program settings Each key s function is listed below e DISPLAY STATUS While the sampler is in the standby or run state pressing the DISPLAY STATUS key allows you to view the program settings or the sampling results See page 3 101 for more details EXIT PROGRAM Pressing the EXIT PROGRAM key while in the program sequence will return the sampler to standby If you press the EXIT PROGRAM key while in the run state it will halt the program the message PROGRAM HALTED will be displayed e CLEAR ENTRY When entering a number use the CLEAR ENTRY key to return to the original entry ENTER PROGRAM Press the ENTER PROGRAM key while in the standby state to cause the sample
171. essages A successful test is indicated by the messages RAM PASSED TEST and ROM PASSED TEST After successful RAM and ROM tests the sampler will then test the LCD by first filling the display with solid rectangles and then printing the alphabet and other characters Each position in the display should contain a character The next step tests the pump During the test the pump will run briefly and the display will indicate an OFF ON number The number should fall within the range of 50 to 200 A count near 100 is typical Example Checking the Configure Option Settings Continued Select ENABLE to turn on the Liquid Detector on DISABLE to turn off the Liquid Detector For the purposes of the following examples select ENABLE Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection You should normally leave the detector enabled unless you suspect it is malfunctioning If you disable the detector you will need to enter the suction head in the program sequence This display appears when you select ENABLE in step 15 For the purposes of this example enter 0 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry Rinse cycles condition the suction line to reduce cross contamination This display appears when you select ENABLE in step 75 For the purposes of the following examples select NO to omit the setting Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection
172. et the number of samples per bottle to 4 9 Enter the sample volume of 200 ml 10 Select YES so you can enter the specific start time 11 When this display first appears it will show you the sampler s guess at the start time Type in the desired start time For this example the start time is 6 00 on 6 20 04 After this message is displayed briefly the sampler automatically returns to the standby state 12 To run the program press the START SAMPLING key after the sampler is installed 13 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here This is used with samples per bottle multiplexing The first line tells the number of the upcoming sample the total number of samples each bottle is to receive and the current bottle number Here the upcoming sample is the first of four samples Bottle 1 The second line indicates the scheduled time of the sample and displays the current time in the right corner When the scheduled sample event time arrives the second line disappears while the sampler completes the pre sample purge When the pump begins to pump forward to deliver the sample sample delivery is indicated by the word PUMPING followed by the sample volume
173. ettings at any time 1 5 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction 1 2 7 Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure 1 3 Delivery System 1 3 1 Liquid Detector 1 3 2 Pump Tubing and Suction Lines The 3700 Series samplers provide displays in French German and Spanish Additionally the software supports entries in metric units of measure Samplers using French and German language displays support metric units for suction line and suction head measurements Metric units include volumes in milliliters suction head and suction line length in decimeters and suction line inside diameter ID in millimeters Samplers with English displays support either English or metric units for suction line and suction head measurements Sample volume units are always entered in milliliters regardless of the selected language The 3700 Series uses a peristaltic pump for sample collection The sample is under pumped flow at all times there are no metering chambers and no gravity fed internal tubing Each sampling cycle includes an air pre sample purge and post sample purge to clear the suction line both before and after sampling These features make the 3700s ideal for both suspended solid and toxic material sampling Cross contamination between samples is minimized and sites for sediment accumulation in the system are eliminated Materials in contact with the sample fluid are limited to the strainer suction line pump tub
174. ew from blast solution for 2 to 15 min at minutes at ing under 0 01 impairs 0 2 Exposure some con sense of smell to 0 07 to 0 1 ditions Odor not evident rapidly causes Sludge gas at high concen acute poison trations Color ing Paralyzes less Flammable respiratory center Methane CH Simple asphyxi 0 55 Acts mechani Probably no limit 5 0 15 0 At top increas Natural 1 Combustible ant cally to deprive provided oxygen ing to certain gas sludge gas indicator Colorless odor tissues of oxy percent age is suf depth gas manu less tasteless gen Doesnot ficient for life factured 2 Oxygen defi flammable support life gas sewer ciency indica gas Strata tor of sedi mentary origin In swamps or marshes Nitrogen N2 Simple asphyxi 0 97 Physiologically Near top but Sewer gas Oxygen ant Colorless inert may be found sludge gas deficiency tasteless near bottom Also issues indicator Non flammable from some Principal constit rock strata uent of air about 79 Nitrogen NO Colorless 1 04 60 to 150 ppm 50 10 Near bottom Industrial NO detector Oxides cause irritation wastes tube N0 Colorless and coughing Common sweet odor 1 53 air pollut Asphyxiant ant NO Reddish brown 1 58 Irritating odor 100 ppm dan Deadly poison gerous 200 ppm fatal Oxygen O Colorless odor 1 11 Normal air con Variable at dif Oxygen Oxygen defi less
175. ey are appropriate for your application Display 255 The sampler is shipped from the factory with four programs the current program and three stored programs numbered from 1 to 3 All four programs contain the factory default program settings Unless you have previously saved a program under one of the program numbers you will replace the current program with the factory default settings by loading a program When you reini tialize the sampler all four programs return to the default program settings Example Load Stored Program 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 3 Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to scroll through the configure options The first option displayed is the Set Clock configure option 4 You can load a stored programmed only when the sampler is configured for the extended programming mode To verify the programming mode setting press the ENTER PROGRAM key lt gt 5 Select EXTENDED Press the enter program key to accept the selection 6 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the Load Stored Program configure option 7 Select the number of the program you want to load Select NONE when you do not want to load a program 3 44 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Load Stored Program Continued When the sampler has loaded the program it will display the ne
176. f four bottles The sampling program requires that four samples be placed in each bottle of the set Indicates the sample and bottle number of the next sample event The current time appears in the lower right corner The sampling program requires that you use one bottle per sample event and that you switch the bottles on a time basis This display alternates with the display illustrated in item 6 at 3 second intervals Indicates the time of the next bottle switch Indicates the sample and bottle numbers of the next sample event The current time is shown in the lower right corner The sampling program requires four bottles per sample event and that the bottle sets be switched on a time basis This display alternates with the display illustrated in item 8 at 3 second intervals Indicates the time of the next bottle set switch Indicates a sample in progress 3 107 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Run State Displays Flow Paced Sampling Indicates the programmed start time of a flow paced sampling program when no sample is to be taken at the start time The first line reports the programmed start time and date the second line reports the current time and date Indicates the programmed start time of a flow paced sampling program when a sample is to be taken at the start time The current time appears in the lower right corner Th
177. from the 12 volt supply All of the ICs used in the 3700 Samplers are powered from the 5 volt rail IC U11 is also used as a low voltage detector con stantly monitoring the 12 volt supply IC U17 A voltage converter provides a 5 volt supply which some compo nents require IC U8 is the microprocessor IC U5 is the ROM and IC U7 is the RAM These three ICs make up the brains of the 3700 Sampler The microprocessor executes the program stored in ROM While executing information program settings sample data etc is retrieved from and stored in RAM A 4 608 MHz crystal oscillator Y1 sets the microprocessor s execution speed The 3700 Sampler keeps track of time with a real time clock IC U3 Both the RAM and IC U3 are battery backed with a lithium battery B1 IC U1 is a switch that selects between battery and system power Three devices allow the microprocessor to communicate with the outside world the 2 line 20 characters per line LCD IC U9 and IC U18 The LCD facilitates communication with the user and is connected through P3 IC U13 transistor Q2 thermistor R15 6 9 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing 6 10 and other components provide the LCD with a temperature com pensated driver voltage By providing temperature compen sation the display quality is optimized over a wide temperature range IC U9 and IC U18 are I O devices that allow the micropro cessor to read the keypad sound the beeper advance th
178. g e Replacement of suction tubing e Changing the internal desiccant The following sections contain instructions for cleaning the sampler case tubing and bottles Cleaning protocols for priority pollutants are given Disassemble the sampler for cleaning by following the instructions found in Assembly and Disassembly of the Case in Section 2 Case You can clean the top cover and sample bottle base with warm soapy water or by spraying them with a hose You can clean the center section in a similar manner if a power source is attached to the 12 VDC connector and the flow meter connector is tightly capped Tubing The suction line and pump tubing can be cleaned by placing the end of the suction line in a cleaning solution and pumping this solution through the tubing system using the pump forward and pump reverse keys Follow with a clean water rinse Sample Bottles The glass sample bottles have a wide mouth to facilitate cleaning You can wash them with a brush and soapy water in a dishwasher or in an autoclave Do not autoclave the plastic lids The 1000 ml polypropylene plastic wedge shaped sample bottles also have a wide mouth and are formed so that they have no inaccessible corners You can wash plastic bottles in a dishwasher but do not autoclave them The following sections are taken from U S Environmental Pro tection Agency Publications EPA 600 4 77 039 Sampling of Water and Wastewater by Dr Phillip E Shelley for
179. g After delay e Delay to Start Time The start time is simply the time the sampler begins the routine The sampler begins timing the delay to start time when you press the start sampling key The sampler will not check for an enable or disable signal from a flow meter Liquid Level Actuator or another sampler until the start time The delay to start time is the amount of time between the time you press the start sampling key and the start time The delay to start time is determined by the programmed start time entry for the STORM routine Display 93 or the Start Time Delay configure option The Start Time Delay set in the configure option can be from 0 to 999 minutes long A programmed start time can be any date within 30 days of the sampler s current date e Delay to First Group Sample The delay to first group sample is the period between the time the sampler is enabled not the start time and the time first sample volume is delivered to the first bottle group Your entry in Display 15 determines the Delay to First Group e Delay to Second Group Samples The delay to second group sample is the period between the time the sampler is enabled not the start time and the time the first sample volume is delivered to the second bottle group This delay is determined by your entry in Display 17 You can enter a delay to second group sample only for time paced second bottle groups e DURING AFTER This delay affects flow paced sec
180. h Display 93 step 18 If you select NO the start time will be delayed by the amount set in the Start Time Delay configure option After you ve made these entries the sampler will present the PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE COMPLETE message and return to standby Programmed start times start time delays and delays to group sample Samplers programmed for storm sampling respond to start time delays and programmed start times in the same way as samplers programmed for any other basic or extended mode routines The sampler will delay the storm routine until the start time entered in the third segment of the STORM sequence See Display 93 If the sampler is enabled by the flow meter at the start time the sampler will begin to time the delay to the first bottle group If the sampler is disabled by the flow meter at the start time the sampler will suspend the routine until it becomes enabled Once the sampler is enabled by the flow meter the sampler will begin the delay to first timed sample event and con tinue the STORM routine STORM sampling routine has four delay periods that vary slightly with the programming entries Every STORM routine will have a delay to start time and delay to first group sample 3 77 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Depending on whether the second bottle group is time paced or flow paced the third delay period will be either the delay to second group sample or the Durin
181. he Master slave mode on Select NO to turn the Master Slave mode off Display 320 Enable Pin configure option Select YES to take a sample at the time the sampler becomes disabled Select NO if you do not want a sample event when the sampler becomes disabled Display 321 E Enable Pin configure option Select YES to take a sample when the sampler becomes enabled i e ceases to receive an inhibit signal from a flow meter or a Liquid Level Actuator Note No sample will be taken if the enable sig nal is used to initiate the start time delay countdown Select NO if you do not want a sample event when the sampler becomes enabled Display 322 Enable Pin configure option Select YES to restart the sample interval countdown at the time the sampler is enabled The interval countdown is determined by the setting if NO is selected in Display 324 Display 323 Enable Pin configure option This display appears if you select NO in Display 323 Select YES to freeze the sam ple interval when the sampler becomes disabled When the sampler is enabled the interval countdown continues from the point where it had stopped Select NO to let the sample interval countdown continue while the sampler is disabled Display 324 Event Mark configure option Select CONTINUOUS SIGNAL to send a variable duration event mark signal from
182. he bags on a piece of heavy paper on a flat metal sheet You can use a brown grocery bag and a typical cookie sheet Do not stack the bags on top of each other or allow them to touch Place in a vented circulating forced air conventional oven in a well venti lated room Allow two inches of air space between the top of the bags and the next metal tray above the bags Keep the tray a minimum of 16 inches from the heating element Heat the bags at a temperature of 240 to 250 F 116 to 121 C for 12 to 16 hours At the end of the time period the bags should be immediately removed and placed in an air tight container for cooling The des iccant will be recharged to approximately 80 to 90 of its previous capacity After repeated recharging the desiccant bag may require replacement Some bags will have the temperature and time for recharging the desiccant printed on the bag If they differ use the temper ature and time printed on the bag 5 9 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance Before reinstalling the cover coat the cover s gasket with a light film of silicone grease to seal the control box Tighten the 10 screws that hold the control box cover and bezel in place using an even cross torquing pattern Screws 10 ISCO 3700 SS Sampler Programming Instructions 1 To place the sampler in a programming mode press 2 Uso or gt to make a selection To accept the blinking solection pross s 3
183. he top of Mt Whitney oxygen is equal to 12 2 t Many hikers go there and to higher peaks as well After adequate acclimation they may climb to the top of Mt Everest where oxygen is equal to only 6 7 The lowest oxygen concentrations that I have observed in a sewer atmosphere was 13 percent It was in a sealed chamber near sea level upstream from an inverted siphon on a metro politan trunk A man would be foolish to enter the chamber Without ventilation he might die but not from lack of oxygen 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures It seems unlikely that anyone has ever died in a sewer from suf focation that is a lack of oxygen Deaths have often been attributed to asphyxiation This is a word which according to the dictionary is used to mean death from an atmosphere that does not support life The word has sometimes been misinter preted as meaning suffocation which is only one kind of asphyxi ation In nearly all cases of death in sewers the real killer is hydrogen sulfide It is important that this fact be recognized Many cities diligently test for explosive gases which is very important and they may measure the oxygen concentration which usually is unimportant but they rarely measure HS Death has occurred where it is unlikely that there was any measurable reduction in the oxygen concentration Waste water containing 2 mg per liter of dissolved sulfide and at a pH of 7 0 can p
184. hort time the display will revert to standby Start Sampling Once you have programmed and configured the sampler use the START SAMPLING key to run the sampling program The first display you ll see after pressing the START SAMPLING key is illustrated below If you want to have the sampling program begin with a bottle other than Bottle 1 enter the first bottle number here If 1 is acceptable press the ENTER PROGRAM key to place the sampler into the run state If you do not press a key within 60 seconds the sampler will automatically enter the run state and will begin the sampling routine with Bottle 1 There are three instances where the sampler will not be able to run the program immediately These occur when the program has been started after 1 the programmed start time 2 the first switch time and 3 one or more programmed stop times The sampler responds to these situations as discussed in Examples Program Started Later Than Programmed Start Time Program Started Later Than Programmed 1st Switch Time and Program Started Later Than Programmed Stop Time Resume Sampling To resume the program press the RESUME SAMPLING key When you press RESUME SAMPLING the program will resume at the point it was halted The display must read PROGRAM HALTED for the resume sampling key to be active If any samples were missed during the time the program was 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines halted
185. hows how to save a current sampling program Example Save Current Program Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state Access the configure sequence by selecting CONFIGURE Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to scroll through the configure options The first option displayed is the Set Clock configure option 3 45 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 46 Example Save Current Program Continued You can save the current program only when the sampler is configured for the extended programming mode To verify the programming mode setting press the ENTER PROGRAM key Select EXTENDED Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection Press the RIGHT ARROW key to skip Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the Save Current Program configure option the Load Stored Program configure option lt gt Select the number you want to use as the program name Select NONE when you do not want to save a program When the sampler has saved the program it will display the next configure option When you are done configuring the sampler press EXIT PROGRAM to return to Standby lt gt When the sampler is properly instal led press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 3 9 9 Flow Mode Sampling The Flow Mode Sampling option directs the sampler to
186. idered true and accurate However United Desiccants makes no warranties expressed or implied as to the accuracy or adequacy of the information contained herein or the results to be obtained from the use thereof This information is offered solely for the user s consideration investigation and verification Since the use and conditions of use of this information and the material described herein are not within the control of United Desiccants United Desiccants assumes no responsibility for injury to the user or third persons The material described herein is sold only pursuant to United Desiccants Terms and Conditions of Sale including those limiting warranties and remedies contained therein It is the responsibility of the user to determine whether any use of the data and information is in accordance with applicable federal state or local laws and regulations G 5 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets Material Safety Data Sheet Indicating Silica Gel Identity Trade Name as Used on Label Manufacturer MULTISORB TECHNOLOGIES INC MSDS Number M75 formerly Multiform Desiccants Inc Address 325 Harlem Road CAS Number Buffalo NY 14224 Phone Number For Information 716 824 8900 Date Prepared July 6 2000 Tae Phone 716 824 8900 Prepared By G E McKedy umber Section 1 Material Identification and Information Components Chemical Name amp Common Names OSHA
187. influence a man s thinking about the seriousness of the real hazards Most important use ample ventilation and do not enter a potentially hazardous structure except in a good safety harness with two men at the top who can lift you out The following table contains information on the properties of hazardous gases Table C 1 Hazardous Gases C 6 Specific Explosive Likely i f Gravity 3 LE MEd BELO Range by Location Most Simplestiand Chemical Common or Vapor Physiological Safe 60 8 Hour vol in air of Common Cheapest Formula Properties Effect Min Exposure Exposure RA i Safe Method Density ppm ppm Limits Highest Sources of Testing Air 1 lower upper Concentration Ammonia NH3 Irritant and 0 60 Causes throat 300 85 16 25 Near top Sewers Detectable poisonous Col and to Concentrates chemical odor at low orless eye irritation at 500 in closed up feed concentrations with characteris 0 05 cough per spaces rooms tic ing odor at 0 17 Short exposure at 0 5 to 1 fatal Benzene CgHg Irritant colorless 2 77 Slight symp 3 000 25 13 GA At bottom Industrial Combustible anesthetic toms to wastes gas indicator after several 5 000 varnish hours solvents exposure at 0 16 to 0 32 2 rapidly fatal Carbon CS3 Nearly odorless 2 64 Very poison 15 1 3 44 0 At bottom Aninsecti Combustible Bisulfide when pure color ous cide gas indicator less anesthetic irritating vom Po
188. ing and col lection bottles You can easily and safely clean the system by replacing relatively inexpensive lengths of tubing Pump speed is approximately 250 RPM which generates a velocity sufficient to obtain representative samples The pumping rate of 3 500 ml per minute is generated when using 3 g inch ID suction line at 3 feet of head The line transport velocity using the same suction line and head is 2 9 feet per second Pump speed does not significantly affect volumetric accuracy because the delivered volume is based on a patented electronic count of the number of pump revolutions The LD90 gives the 3700s the ability to deliver accurate repeatable sample volumes regardless of changing head condi tions Typical sample volumes are accurate to within 10 of the programmed volume and repeatable to within 10 ml When concerns of cross contamination arise the detector and a pro grammable setting provide for automatic rinsing of the suction line A programmable setting for sampling retries is available If the suction line becomes clogged and no liquid is detected in the line you can program the sampler to repeat a purge cycle as many as three times to clear the clogged line The pump tubing is Silastic medical grade silicon rubber Liquid is transferred from the source to the pump through either 1 4 or 8 inch ID vinyl or s inch ID PTFE suction tubing You can easily replace the pump tubing and suction lines minimizi
189. ing Stops and Resumes feature Start Time Delay Basic amp Extended Sets the start time delay from 0 to 9999 minutes If no specific start time is entered in the program sequence the program uses the entered start time delay The delay is the amount of time that will elapse after you press the start sampling key or after the sampler is enabled Enable Pin Basic amp Extended Directs the sampler to take a sample when disabled and or enabled by a Liquid Level Actuator or other Isco Flow monitoring equipment Allows you to restart the sampling interval when the sampler is enabled Event Mark Basic amp Extended Allows you to select one of four types of event marks Purge Counts Basic amp Extended Adjusts the number of pre and post sample purge counts Tubing Life Basic amp Extended Displays the pump tubing life information Resets the tubing life count Program Lock Basic amp Extended Enables disables the password protection for input displays Sampler ID Basic amp Extended Allows you to enter a 10 character ID number for the sampler Run Diagnostics Basic amp Extended Tests the RAM ROM pump and distributor Allows for reinitializa tion of certain program and configure settings 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 8 5 3 Configure Sequence The program sequence and the configure sequence are interde pendent The selections you
190. ings It is configured for the basic program mode and for the bottle configuration and suction line ordered with the sampler 3 6 Programming The procedure used to program the sampler follows the steps Procedure listed below Because the configuration settings determine portions of the program sequence and affect the accuracy of the sample check the configuration settings before programming 1 Determine the equipment you will be using with the sam pler You will need to know the capacity of the bottles and the inside diameter type vinyl or TEFLON and length of the suction line You will need this information to verify and revise the configuration settings in step 2 If you will be using the sampler for composite sampling you may need to convert the sampler The section Conver sion for Composite Sampling in Section 4 2 provides infor mation on converting the 3700 Standard for composite sampling Example Time Paced Composite Sampling dem onstrates the configuration changes you must make 2 Check the configuration settings From standby access the interactive state Select the configure sequence Check the 3 12 3 6 1 Following Display Cues 3 6 2 Keypad Description 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines configuration settings revising any settings as needed select basic or extended programming mode Return to the standby state Example Checking the Configure Option Settings shows you how to check and
191. ion Line It is wise to replace the suction line when it becomes worn cut contaminated or otherwise damaged Inspect the line periodi cally for damage In critical sampling you may need to replace the suction line between sampling programs to avoid cross con tamination When site conditions change you will need to replace the suction line with a different diameter or type of line vinyl or PTFE Replacement Vinyl Line Teledyne Isco offers two forms of replacement vinyl suction lines First a complete suction line with strainer and tube coupling is available in 10 foot and 25 foot lengths for each of the 4 inch and s inch ID Inside Diameter vinyl suction lines Second bulk suction line in the l4 inch ID and 8 inch ID vinyl tube is available in 100 and 500 foot rolls Cut the bulk suction line to even foot lengths The vinyl suction tubing contains a very low PPM parts per million level of phenols If this affects your samples use the PTFE suction line 5 4 1 Vinyl Suction Line The following sections discuss the replacement of the complete suction line strainer assemblies the sizing of the suction line and the assembly and installation of the bulk tubing Remove the suction line from the pump tubing by detaching the tube coupling see Section 2 4 1 If you must use a completely new suction line strainer assembly of the standard 10 or 25 foot length install it as described in Section 2 4 1 Bulk Suction Line If y
192. ior of 3700 Standard Center Section View of the Pump Tube 5 5 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance Inner Pump Housing Outer Pump Housing Captive Thumb Screws 6 Pump Shaft Locate bands here to correctly place tubing Figure 5 3 Interior of Liquid Detector and Pump Housing 5 6 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance 5 3 3 Installing a New Pump To install a new pump tube follow the steps listed below Tube 1 The pump tube is marked with two black bands These bands are used to correctly locate the tubing in the detector and pump Correct placement is critical to prolonging the life of the pump tube and to assuring efficient operation and accurate sample volumes Facing the liquid detector place the inner edge of the end band against the upper left inlet of the liquid detector Place the inner band at the lower outlet of the liquid detec tor Figure 5 3 above shows the correct placement of the tubing at the liquid detector Slip the pump tubing under the rollers so that the pump tubing does not interfere with the installation of the outer pump lid Replace the outer pump lid and tighten the four thumb screws Recheck the position of the marker bands and adjust the tubing if the position of the tubing has slipped Replace the outer case of the liquid detector and tighten the two thumbscrews M Note For proper operation of the liquid detect
193. ipment Figure 4 2 6 pin Connector Diagram 4 4 4 3 2 Non Isco Flow Meters Table 4 1 Flow Meter Connector Wiring CB common MES Master Slave Out Table 4 3 Printer Connector Wiring Ce common Co ann You can connect certain non Isco Flow meters directly to a 3700 for flow paced sampling The flow meter must have an isolated contact closure of at least 25 milliseconds to provide acceptable flow pulses to the sampler The frequency of the contact closure must be directly proportional to total flow Teledyne Isco offers both a connector and cable clamp to connect a non Isco Flow meter to the 3700 samplers Connect the flow meter pulse output to the A and C pins of the 6 pin Flow Meter connector on the 3700 Figure 4 2 Refer to your flow meter s instruction manual for further details 4 3 3 4 20 mA Flow Signals 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment Teledyne Isco also offers a connector prewired to a 22 foot 6 7 meter cable that terminates in two wires The black wire is connected to pin A the white wire to pin C Note that you will be unable to communicate anything other than the flow pulse contact closure with a non Isco Flow meter The non Isco Flow meter will not be able to interpret event and bottle number information If the flow pulse generated by the contact closure on the flow meter is not compatible with Teledyne Isco s standard contact Teledyne Isco s Special Products Dep
194. irst report contains sampler status information and program settings The second report contains the sampling results Because the text file is preformatted into report form you can use DOS printing commands to print the file without editing with a word processor The sample event files are identical to those created by 1 9 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction 1 5 4 Liquid Level Actuator 1 5 5 Master Slave Cables 1 6 Technical Specifications Flowlink when it retrieves sample event data from an Isco flow meter or flow logger Because these files are fully compatible with Flowlink Flowlink can use the files in its sampling reports and graphs Teledyne Isco s Liquid Level Actuator is used to provide level sensitive control of the sampler The actuator can be used as an alternative to a flow meter Master Slave Interconnect Cable Connects two 3700 Sam plers as master and slave 3700 Master Slave to Flow Meter Cable Connects two 3700 Samplers as master and slave and connects the pair to an open channel flow meter Technical specifications for the 3700 Standard and Compact Samplers can be found in the following table Table 1 1 Technical Specifications for the 3700 Portable Samplers Standard 3700 Physical Specifications Physical Size Height 25 25 in 64 1 cm Diameter 19 88 in 50 5 cm Dry Weight 37 5 lbs 17 0 kg with polypropylene bottles Operational Temperature Range 32 to 120 F
195. isonous iting convulsions psychic distur bance 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures Table C 1 Hazardous Gases Continued Specific Explosive Likely i f Gravity 3 max WEN EELS Range by Location Most Simpiesnand Chemical Common Physiological Safe 60 8 Hour rar Cheapest Formula Properties onyapor Effect Min Exposure Exposure yolan alr Gu common Safe Method Density ppm ppm Limits Highest Sources of Testing Air 1 lower upper Concentration Carbon Asphyxiant Col 1 53 Cannot be 40 000 5 000 At bottom Products Oxygen Dioxide orless odorless endured at 10 to when heated of com deficiency When breathed more than a 60 000 may stratify bustion indicator in large quanti few minutes at points sewer gas ties may cause even if subject above bottom sludge acid taste is at rest and Also issues Non flammable oxygen content from car Not generally is normal Acts bona present in dan on respiratory ceous gerous amounts nerves strata unless an oxygen deficiency exists Carbon co Chemical 0 97 Combines with 400 50 12 5 74 0 Near top espe Manufac CO ampoules Monox asphyxiant Col hemoglobin of cially if present tured gas ide orless odorless blood Uncon with illuminat flue gas tasteless sciousness in ing gas products Flammable 30 min at 0 2 of com Poisonous to 0 25 Fatal bustion in 4 hours at motor 0 1 Head exhausts ache in few Fires of
196. isplay 24 N Display 22 SAMPLE INTERVAL OF SAMPLE EVERY ___ MINUTE 1 9999 PULSES 1 9999 Display 110 MAX FLOW INTERVAL OF HOURS MINUTES AA Display 30 Sp NT A ance A rS BOTTLES PER Display 70 SAMPLE EVENT 1 MAX i 4 7 STORM Key Times SUCTION HEAD OF K i Ny Display 31 FEET 1 MAX f SAMPLES PER a pE Ai BOTTLE 1 MAX NZ Display 80 CALIBRATE SAMPLE po y Dipiey 50 VOLUME YES NO G SAMPLE VOLUMES OF J T ____ mIEACH 10 MAX WV Display 90 ENTER START TIME YES NO Vv Display 93 STORM ENABLED AFTER HH MM DD MMM AVA PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE COMPLETE Figure 3 12 Extended Programming Mode STORM Programming 3 61 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 10 5 Sampling The Stops and Resumes settings are available only when you Stop Resume have enabled the Sampling Stop Resume configure option You must first enter the number of stops and resumes from 0 to 24 Enter 0 if you want to omit the stop and resume settings without returning to the configure sequence and disabling the Stops and Resumes option Then enter the stop and resume clock times The first entry will be a stop time Refer to the Key Times section of Figure 3 12 Display s 100 101 and 102 Determining the Number of Samples With Stops and Resumes When using stops and resumes determining the number of samples you want deposited in the container requires a little planning
197. itoring installation Equipment Checklist The equipment listed below is sug gested for typical storm event monitoring e 3700 Sampler and power source You can use a 2 4 8 or 24 bottle configuration for STORM routines depending on which 3700 model you have e 4200 Series Flow Meter or 4100 Series Flow Logger and power source e A Sampler to Flow Meter Connect Cable Optional Equipment Checklist e Rain gauge with cable and connector Rain gauges are required for rain event triggered sampling e Flowlink software requires IBM compatible computer system Although the flow meter contains the sampler enable conditions most often used in storm water runoff monitoring you can use the Flowlink system to download many additional sample enable conditions to the flow meter Refer to the Flowlink help menu for more information e Interrogator communication line kit to connect a computer to the flow meter This kit provides the computer to flow meter cabling Isco Flow Meters can also be equipped with a modem to communicate with Flowlink over standard telephone lines e Solar Panel Battery Charger Installation Checklist This checklist summarizes the four steps required to set up a storm monitoring installation 1 Program and install the flow meter Install the rain gauge if used You can program 4200 Series Flow Meters for sampler enable control conditions from the flow meter front panel or use Flowlink and a computer
198. l number will reappear You must enter an acceptable value to advance to the next step Editing Numbers You can use the left arrow and CLEAR ENTRY keys to edit numeric entries if they are used after you press a numeric key and before you press the ENTER PROGRAM key The CLEAR ENTRY key will clear any typed number and the original number will reappear The left arrow will erase the most recently typed number Some numeric input displays prompt you to enter more than one value In the illustration below the prompt asks for five numeric entries hours minutes day month and year You can use the left and right arrow keys to move back and forth between each of the five entries Changed individual entries as discussed above Pressing the right arrow or ENTER PROGRAM key on the last entry will store the values and advance the display Military Times You must enter times in military format To set the sampler s clock to 3 30 p m enter a time of 15 30 When the display above first appears the first two digits 12 will blink To enter a new time type in the new hour 15 Store the hour entry and advance to minutes by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you do not need to change the month or year entry accept the entry by pressing the right arrow or ENTER PROGRAM key Use the left arrow key to return to a pre vious position Press the right arrow or ENTER PROGRAM key on the last entry 04 to store the value and adva
199. lace all of the hardware and secure the grounding straps 6 5 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing 6 1 6 Removal of the Pump The pump gear case assembly is located in the lower section of Gear Case Assembly the control box For access to the lower section of the control box follow the instructions in the section entitled Access to Electronic Components Follow the steps below to remove the pump gear case 1 7 Remove the distributor gear case as discussed in Section 6 1 5 above Remove the liquid detector lid and the pump lid by loosen ing the captivated thumbscrews on the outer pump hous ing Figure 5 2 shows the location of the thumbscrews Remove the pump tubing from the interior of the pump Remove the pump rotor by loosening the machine screw and lock nut attaching the rotor to the pump shaft Figure 5 3 shows the location of the machine screw Rotate the rotor until you can reach the screw with a screwdriver inserted through the pump housing inlet sleeve Slide the rotor off the pump shaft Remove the inner pump housing by unscrewing the four screws surrounding the pump shaft taking care to hold the pump gear case assembly in place Carefully lift the pump gear case assembly out of the con trol box The pump gear case can be reinstalled by reversing these steps Ensure that you replace all of the hardware and secure the grounding straps Figure 6 4 Control Box Tray Removal 6 6 Gr
200. ld of the control of hydrogen sulfide and other odors in sewers and treatment plants He has personally worked in a great many functioning sewers In the earlier years he did so he admits with little knowledge of the grave hazards to which he exposed himself It is gratifying that the subject of hazards to people working in sewers is receiving much more attention than in past years and good safety procedures are prescribed in various publications on this subject It is essential that people know and use correct pro cedures It is less important to know just what the hazardous compo nents of sewer atmospheres are as safety precautions should in general be broadly applicable but there should be a reasonable understanding of this subject It is disturbing to see statements in print that do not reflect true conditions One of the most common errors is the assumption that people have died from a lack of oxygen The human body is able to function very well with substantially reduced oxygen concentra tions No one worries about going to Santa Fe New Mexico elev 2 100 meters where the partial pressure of oxygen is equal to 16 2 a normal atmosphere is about 21 oxygen When first going there a person may experience a little shortness of breath following exercise People in good health are not afraid to drive over the high passes in the Rocky Mountains At Loveland Pass oxygen pressure is 13 2 of a normal atmosphere At t
201. le event includes pre sample and post sample purges line rinses liquid detection retries and deliveries of sample volumes No more than one sample volume is placed in any one bottle during a sample event F 1 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix F Glossary F 2 Sample volume The sample volume is the discrete pro grammed amount of sample delivered to each bottle A single sample event may deliver several sample volumes Samples per bottle Samples per bottle is the number of dis crete sample volumes placed in each bottle Sampling program See sampling routine Sampling routine A sampling routine also called a sampling program is the process of taking samples according to the program settings you enter when programming and configuring the controller The program settings define the sample pacing distribution volume and key clock times Suction head Suction head is the vertical distance from the surface of the flow stream to the pump inlet 3700 Portable Samplers ee I Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets This appendix provides Material Safety Data sheets for the internal desiccant used in the 3700 sampler Specific questions regarding the use and handling of these products should be directed to the manufacturer listed in the MSDS 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets 101 Christine Drive Belen New Mexico 87002 SUD CHEMIE Phone 505 864 6691 cka Fax 505 861 2355 P
202. led at start time 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Start Time TIME PACING basic programming FLOW PACING basic and extended programming UNIFORM TIME INTERVALS extended programming NONUNIFORM TIME INTERVALS IN MINUTES extended programming Sample event at start time e Timed sample events Always occurs e Flow paced events Occurs when sampler configured for sample at start time in Flow Mode configure option Sampler enabled Sampler Disabled E I g gt e No Manual Samples Sample event on enable e Timed sample events Always occurs e Flow paced events Occurs when sampler configured for sample upon enable in Enable Pin configure option I time or flow interval Figure 3 14 Start Time Diagram 3 65 3700 Porta ble Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines START SAMPLING Start Time Delay to Start Time Determined by first nonuniform clock time entry e No Manual Samples e Disable Signal Ignored Sampler enabled at start time Sampler disabled at start time I I I N Start time is first nonuniform clock time Sample event always occurs Programmed sample events skipped while sampler disabled Sampler enabled I I I I gt Sampler Disabled e No Manual Sample
203. m the Center Section 6 1 4 Access to Electronic Components CAUTION The voltage levels produced by static buildup from walking over carpeted floors movement of woolen or synthetic clothes over chair seats workbenches etc are high enough to destroy CMOS circuitry when you are performing repair work To gain access to the electronic components housed in the control box 1 Disconnect the power source from the sampler 2 Remove the 10 screws around the outer edge of the con trol box lid as indicated in Figure 5 4 6 3 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing 3 Lift the cover and frame off the control box as shown in Figure 6 2 and turn it over 4 You can disconnect the control box cover assembly from the control box lower section by disconnecting the five connectors indicated in Figure 6 2 and the grounding strap 5 The main circuit board assembly of the 3700 is protected by an aluminum shield To remove this shield unscrew the four screws and the nut shown in Figure 6 2 and lift off the shield This reveals the main circuit board shown in Figure 6 3 6 To remove the circuit board assembly from the control box cover unscrew the four hex threaded stand offs and the Phillips head screw shown in Figure 6 2 You can now pull the circuit board away from the control box cover 7 To disconnect the circuit board assembly from the cover disconnect the connector shown in Figure 6 3 The control box can b
204. mage to the sampler Check the condition of the pump tube regularly and if the tube shows signs of fatigue or wear replace it immediately A properly maintained sampler will pro vide the years of reliable service that is expected of a Teledyne Isco Sampler The inspections should be fairly frequent when the liquid being sampled contains a high percentage of suspended solids If the liquid is relatively free of solids the inspections can be less fre quent The Tubing Life configure option reports the number of pump counts elapsed during the life of the pump tube 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance WARNING Pump may actuate without warning To avoid injury sampler must be off when pump housing cover is removed for inspection or tubing replacement The amount of tubing 13 5 inches used in the pump is less than half of the total length of the pump tube 42 inches In some cases when the tube has not been damaged to the point of leaking the tube can be used twice by simply turning it around NM Note The black bands used to assist you in correctly positioning the tubing in the pump and detector are placed on one end only If you turn the tubing around you be unable to use the bands for reference 5 3 2 Removing the Pump To remove the tubing Tubing 1 Disconnect power from the unit 2 Separate the center section from the remainder of the sam pler as described in Assembly and Disassembly of the Case
205. me Paced Sampling Uniform Intervals Continued This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample is completed It indicates the bottle number which is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The second line displays the scheduled time for the next event on the left The current time is displayed on the right The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done 1 L When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at uniform time intervals of 15 minutes At each sample event one bottle will receive a sample volume of 75 ml The bottles are to be switched every hour so that four sample volumes have been deposited into each bottle The sampling routine will start according to the programmed start time delay set in the Start Time Delay configure option Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 2 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM 3 Select TIME 4 Select UNIFORM 6 Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 7 Enter 1 to set the numb
206. me of 400 ml Display 110 Display 30 Display 31 Display 50 Select YES to enter a start time in the following step Display 90 This display requires two entries Enter a time of 06 00 and a date of 20 06 to start the storm routine at 6 00 a m on June 20 Display 93 er will automatically return to the sta ndby state 19 This display appears when you press START SAMPLING The displays shown in step 22 alternate as the sampler s clock approaches the start time The first line reports the bottles which will receive the first sample volumes for each bottle group The second line reports the start time at the left and the current time on the right As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears This message remains through the post sample purge 3 96 The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Storm Sampling Continued When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date 3 16 Standby State 3 16 1 Operable Keys in Standby State A sampler in the standby state is waiting for your instr
207. ming the sam pler for composite sampling you must convert the 3700 Standard sampler mechanically for single bottle compositing This requires the composite conversion kit which contains the extra equipment needed to adapt the sampler for composite sampling Conversion procedures are discussed in the instruction sheets provided with the conversion kit With the 3700 Compact you merely insert the bottle into the base 3 3 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 4 You can combine the types of sample pacing and sample distri bution Thus you can take time or flow paced sequential samples and time or flow paced composite samples Each combi nation of pacing is noted below Time Paced Sequential In a time paced sequential sample samples are collected at equal increments of time Each bottle receives one sample Flow Paced Sequential In a flow paced sequential sample samples are collected at equal volumes of flow as measured by an associated flow meter Each bottle receives one sample Time Paced Composite In a composite time sample the indi vidual samples are combined into a single container Samples are collected at equal increments of time Flow Paced Composite In a composite flow sample the indi vidual samples are combined into a single container Samples are collected at equal increments of flow volume as measured by an associated flow meter Multiplexing You can multiplex both time paced
208. missed only one sample will be taken 3 104 3 17 5 Error Messages and Missed Samples 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Power The sample event was initiated to compensate for a missed sample which should have occurred while the sampler was without power If more than one sample was missed only one sample will be taken Enable The sample event was initiated when the sampler became enabled by a device connected to pin F of the flow meter connector generally a 4200 Series Flow Meter a 4100 Series Flow Logger or Liquid Level Actuator This source is also reported when the sample was initiated at a programmed resume time Two different configure option settings control this event the Sample Upon Enable setting in the Enable Pin con figure option and the Sample at Resume setting in the Sampling Stop Resume configure option Manual The sample event was initiated with the manual sample key and was counted as one of the programmed sample events Time Switch The sample event was initiated at the pro grammed switch time This event is controlled by the Sample at Time Switch setting in the Flow Mode Sampling configure option This option is available for flow paced sampling only Disable The sample event was initiated when the sampler became disabled by a device connected to pin F of the flow meter connector generally a 4200 Series Flow Meter a 4100 Series Flow Logger or a Liquid Level Actuator This
209. mming mode Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling demon strates the procedure used for samples per bottle multiplexing Example Extended Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling shows the bottles per sample multiplexing procedure The extended mode also offers multiple bottle compositing refer to Example Flow Paced Sampling Time Based Bottle Sets In the extended programming mode you can switch bottles or bottle sets after a programmed time period elapses or after a pro grammed number of samples have been deposited The displays 3 57 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines used to specify the type of switches are shown in the Sample Dis tribution section of Figures 3 10 3 11 and 3 12 Display 40 allows you to select either TIME or SAMPLES If you select TIME the bottles can be changed after a programmed period of time If you select SAMPLES the bottles can be switched after a programmed number of samples In Display 41 which allows you to switch bottle sets you can select either TIME or SAMPLES BTL If you select TIME the bottle sets can be changed after a programmed period of time If you select SAMPLES BTL the bottle sets can be changed after a pro grammed number of samples You can use select either TIME SAMPLES or SAMPLE BTL settings with both time and flow paced sampling 3 10 3 Extended Mode The ex
210. mple event data from the samplers The 3700 Sampler sends event marks to Isco Flow meters each time a sample is taken You can retrieve the stored data from the Isco Flow Meter which expands the information available from the sampler s results dis plays with a computer running Flowlink For more information on sampler enable control conditions and data retrieval refer to the help section provided with the Flowlink software You can connect certain non Isco Flow meters directly to a 3700 for flow paced sampling The flow meter must have an isolated contact closure of at least 25 milliseconds to provide acceptable flow pulses to the sampler The frequency of the contact closure must be directly proportional to total flow If the flow signal is not compatible with Teledyne Isco s standard Teledyne Isco offers special interfacing devices See Sections 4 3 2 and 4 3 3 Teledyne Isco provides an additional software package that col lects data from the sampler s memory Samplink which runs on a PC or laptop computer that can be transported to the sampling installation to collect the data through the connector on the side of the sampler controller labeled PRINTER Samplink collects data and formats a text file that can load into a word processor for editing and a Flowlink compatible sample event file Sam plink s file contains the same reports produced by the Teledyne Isco Field Printer which is no longer sold by Teledyne Isco The f
211. mple purge the display changes to indicate the bottle numbers of the next bottle set The dis play will change as it receives each flow pulse The cycle repeats until the sampling routine is completed When the routine is complete the display indicates the status DONE the number of sample events and the cur rent time and date 3 33 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Composite Sampling demonstrates the pro gramming procedures for a composite sampling routine When composite sampling with the 3700 Standard you must convert the unit for single bottle sampling With the 3700 Compact you must install the proper bottle into the base After converting the 3700 Standard check the settings to verify the sampler is configured for composite sampling This example begins with a demonstration of the steps needed to check the Bottles and Sizes configure option settings The Bottles and Sizes configure settings should indicate that only one bottle is being used Be sure to enter the correct bottle volume The settings used in this example are for the 4 gallon 15 000 ml composite bottle available with the 3700 Standard This time paced routine will take samples at 15 minute intervals for a 12 hour period Sample volumes are to be 250 ml each When entering the program settings you must enter the number of samples required before entering the sample
212. mplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists 603103268 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST SHEET 8 OF 10 TELEDYNE ISCO INC REV R DATE 08111 i PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 4 603703016 ICROSWI TCH MOUNTING PLATE 42 601484033 ICROSWITCH ASSEMBLY SHUT OFF 43 603704163 DISTRIBUTOR TOP PLATE ASSEMBLY CE 44 603703038 DISTRIBUTOR DRIVE STANDOFF 45 603703009 TOP SUPPORT BUSHING 46 23360900 FINGER SPRING WASHER 81 ID X 1 10 OD A 233019000 WASHER FLAT 770 ID X 969 OD SST 48 603704174 DISTRIBUTOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 49 603703250 VISTRIBUTER BASE PLATE CE 50 20900171 RETAINING RING EXTERNAL 1 00 SHAFT STEEL 5 603704164 DISTRIBUTOR WIRING HARNESS CE annee ANR PAGE HAG I OE 53 60370401 GENEVA DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY 54 209000501 RETAINING RING EXTERNAL 125 SHAFT SST 59 602703062 GEAR MODIFICATION COMBINATION N48 12 80 56 602703151 IDLER SHAFT oni 603704165 DISTRIBUTOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY CE 58 603703036 STANDOFF 6 32 X 25 HEX X 1 560 LONG AL 16 603703260 STANDOFF 6 32 X 250 HEX X 1 50 LONG AL ee id St RS 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists 603703
213. mpling routines If you use a master slave pair with a flow meter the flow meter usually provides pacing controls rather than sampler enable controls However storm water runoff monitoring is a non continuous event driven application requiring a different servicing cycle In many storm monitoring applications the master slave pair and a flow meter make up a monitoring system activated by a storm event The flow meter provides sampler enable controls triggered by a storm event After the storm event and the master slave pair have completed their routines you must service and restart the entire system Not only must you service the samplers but you must reset the flow meter sampler enable control to detect another storm event You will find instructions for installing and starting a master slave pair in a storm monitoring application in the STORM Sampling Check List For information on installing and resetting a system see the Teledyne Isco Storm Water Runoff Monitoring Pocket Guide 4 7 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment 4 8 3700 Portable Samplers LE SS SY Section 5 Routine Maintenance 5 1 Cleaning the Sampler 5 2 Cleaning Protocols for Priority Pollutants This section covers routine maintenance of the 3700 Portable Samplers It includes the following sections e Cleaning the sampler case tubing and sample bottles e Cleaning protocols for priority pollutants e Replacement of pump tubin
214. mposite Sampling Indicates the sample number of the next sample and the total number of samples for time paced routines The current time is shown in the lower right corner Indicates the sample number of the next sample and the total number of samples for flow paced routines Indicates a sample in progress 3 109 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 110 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment 4 1 Introduction 4 2 Composite Sampling 4 2 1 Conversion Procedure This section discusses major options available with the Teledyne Isco 3700 Standard and Compact Samplers Included is infor mation about e Conversion for composite sampling e Programming and configuring the controller for composite sampling e Connection to Teledyne Isco and non Isco Flow meters e Interface devices e Master Slave operation e Use with the 1640 Liquid Level Actuator The 3700 Standard and Compact Samplers are fully program mable for time paced and flow paced composite sampling The object of composite sampling is to collect a series of discrete equal volume samples at known time or flow intervals and to place these samples into a single composite sample container To prepare your 3700 Standard for composite sampling you must convert the center section To do so remove the distributor arm assembly install a shorter pump tu
215. mum flow interval setting affects routines that fill the second bottle group with flow paced samples The maxi mum flow interval setting limits the amount of time between flow paced sample events For example if the flow rate declines so that the amount of time between flow paced sam ple events exceeds a maximum flow interval setting of two hours the sampler will terminate the routine when more than two hours elapses between events The maximum flow interval setting allows the sampler to ter minate the routine when the flow rate falls below an accept able rate or drops off completely This limits the sampling routine to one storm event so that samples from multiple storm events are not deposited into the bottle groups This section provides two checklists a list of suggested storm monitoring equipment and a brief installation checklist Notes on terminating a routine manual sampling during a storm routine and a storm routine s run state displays follow the checklist Example Storm Sampling contains a STORM programming example You can find additional information about storm monitoring installations in the Teledyne Isco Storm Water Runoff Moni toring Pocket Guide The pocket guide contains the following information e How to connect the sampler and rain gauge to the flow meter e Programming examples for flow meters and samplers 3 67 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines e How to start and restart the mon
216. n allows you to monitor pump tubing wear Enter Head Manually When the detector is enabled you can optionally enter the head manually allowing you to add the suction head entry Display 70 to the program sequence When the detector is disabled the Suction Head entry is auto matically added to the program sequence By disabling the suction head setting you allow the liquid detector to determine the operating suction head each time a sample is taken When the head is stable and known accurately you can further increase the accuracy of the delivered volume by using the Suction Head entry in conjunction with the liquid detector When the head is variable or unknown select NO because an incorrect head setting will diminish the delivered volume accuracy Display 242 3 41 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 9 6 Programming Mode Sampling Retries The Sampling Retries option is available when the detector is enabled It sets the number of times from 0 to 3 the sampler will try to detect liquid in the line before skipping the sample You can use this option when sampling liquid with a high concentration of solids that tend to clog the suction line or the strainer The sampler will also retry the rinse cycle when you are using the Sampling Retry option Display 243 The Programming Mode option allows you to specify either basic or extended programming mode The basic programming mode is used fo
217. n those discussed here may be required The following procedures are those used by Black amp Veatch a respected consulting firm and are published here by permission Field personnel must keep safety uppermost in their minds at all times When working above ground rules of common sense and safety prevail However when entering manholes strict safety procedures must be observed Failure to do so could jeop ardize not only your own life but also the lives of other crew members 1 Hazards There are many hazards connected with entering manholes Some of the most common hazards are Adverse Atmosphere The manhole may contain flammable or poisonous gases or the atmosphere may be deficient in oxygen Forced ventilation may be necessary Deteriorated Rungs Manhole steps may be corroded and not strong enough to support a man It may be difficult to inspect the rungs because of poor lighting Traffic Whenever manholes are located in the traveled way barricades and warning devices are essential to direct traffic away from an open manhole Falling Object Items placed near the manhole opening may fall and injure a worker in the manhole 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures C 2 Sharp Edges Sharp edges of items in or near a manhole may cause cuts or bruises Lifting Injuries Unless proper tools are used to remove manhole covers back injuries or injuries to hands or feet may
218. n tubing 5 1 ft sec 8 inch ID suction tubing 2 5 ft sec Clock Specifications Real Time Clock Accuracy 1 minute month typical Sample Specifications Sample Volume Accuracy With the liquid detector enabled and automatic compensation for head typically the greater of 10 or 20 ml over a head range of 1 to 12 feet and sampler supply voltage of 10 to 13 volts Sample Volume Repeatability 10 ml typical Sample Frequency Selectable from one minute to 99 hours 59 minutes in 1 minute increments between consecutive samples or from 1 to 9999 flow pulses in single pulse inter vals Enter nonuniform times in minute intervals or clock time Flow Meter Signal Specifications Flow Meter Signal Requirements 5 to 15 volt DC pulse or isolated contact closure of at least 25 milliseconds in duration 4 20 mA or pulse duration signal may be converted with optional inter face unit 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction M Note If you should experience interference with radio or television reception while using this equipment try to correct the interfer ence by one or more of the following measures e Reorient the receiving antenna on the television e Relocate the unit with respect to the receiver e Plug the unit into a different outlet so the unit and receiver are on different branch circuits e If necessary consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio television
219. nable or disable condition by moni toring the voltage on pin F It interprets high voltage as an enable signal and low voltage or ground as a disable signal Sample Upon Enable When you are using a flow meter or Liquid Level Actuator SAMPLE UPON ENABLE allows you to direct the sampler to take a sample as soon as the sampler is enabled through pin F A response of YES causes the sampler to take a sample when the pin is enabled A response of NO pre vents the sampler from taking a sample when the pin is enabled Display 322 Reset Sample Interval Reset Sample Interval controls the time or flow pulse countdown If you select YES a full sample interval begins when pin F is enabled If you select NO the interval will not be reset when the sampler is enabled the set tings entered in the INHIBIT COUNTDOWN option will be used If you are sampling on a time paced basis and wish to syn chronize all sampling with real time do not reset the sample interval Display 323 Inhibit Countdown INHIBIT COUNTDOWN is only applicable when you respond NO to RESET SAMPLE INTERVAL The Inhibit Countdown option controls the countdown while the sampler is disabled Select YES to freeze the countdown to the next sample The count will resume when the sampler is enabled Select NO to allow the countdown to continue while the sampler is disabled Display 324 A sampler that ha
220. nce to the next display European Date Format The sampler uses the European date format where the day precedes the month s three letter abbrevi ation To enter a date enter the day before the month s number and the year The sampler converts the numeric entry to the three letter abbreviation for you Exit Program Key The user can exit an input display by pressing the EXIT PROGRAM key If you use the EXIT PROGRAM key it will not alter the currently stored setting 3 7 Programming The examples throughout Section 3 demonstrate the steps used Examples to check the configure option settings and to program the sampler for several different sampling routines The pro gramming examples in this manual present each display in the order in which they appear on the sampler They are designed to provide you with step by step procedures and are provided as models for you to use later when programming the sampler for your real applications Each programming example concludes 3 18 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines with the run state displays that appear while that routine is being executed You can use the run state displays to monitor the sampler s progress through a routine Examples Time Paced Sequential Sampling through Time Paced Composite Sampling illustrate the basic programming sequence Because many of the features of the extended programming mode are affected by selections made in the configure
221. nclude information about each sample event and reports problems encountered during the program This information remains in memory until you start another program You can retrieve this information with a laptop computer running Teledyne Isco s Samplink software Two reports are pro duced containing the sampler ID current status program set tings and sampling results If a sampling routine is in progress when you press the DISPLAY STATUS key the sampling routine will be suspended No samples will be taken until you exit Display Status 3 101 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 17 3 Reviewing or Printing 3 102 Program Information If the pump count reaches the number entered for the Tubing Life Warning setting the Pump Tubing Warning will be dis played An illustration of the warning is shown below The sampler tracks and reports the following items e program start time and date e sample volume e source of each sample event e cause of any missed samples e start time of each sample event e number of pump counts to liquid detection for each event e time the routine was completed e sampler ID e current time and date e program settings Each of these items is illustrated in Example Reviewing the Sampling Results When you press DISPLAY STATUS the display shown below follows the pump tubing warning It allows you to review the program settings or sampling results Display 148
222. ne Isco 4200 Series Flow Meters or the 4100 Series Flow Logger and the Flowlink software You can program the flow meter to monitor the flow 1 2 4 Master Slave Sampling 1 2 5 Accurate Sample Volumes 1 2 6 Flexible Start Times 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction stream for storm conditions a specific amount of rainfall for example and enable the sampler when it detects those condi tions A notable feature is the master slave setting which allows you to operate two 3700 Samplers as a master slave pair Master slave sampler pairing doubles the capacity of a sampling installation and to perform continuous sampling Two samplers can be connected so that one sampler the master inhibits the operation of the second sampler the slave until the master completes its sampling routine The samplers then reverse roles You can service a full sampler while its counterpart is running a routine In some applications master slave pairs can reduce the number of visits to an installation A reduced number of visits is important when considering the costs and safety of a sampling study Master Slave STORM Sampling The 3700 Sampler provides a STORM variant of master slave sampling In STORM sam pling the master sampler enables the slave sampler when the master sampler completes its STORM routine The slave sampler then completes its routine but does not enable the first sampler at the end of the slave routine The slave
223. nes Run State In the run state the sampler is executing the sam pling routine and operating under program control While the sampling routine is executed the LCD displays a number of mes sages communicating the sampler s progress through the routine It reports the current bottle or bottle set current time or flow pulse count and remaining time or pulse count to the next sample These messages vary according to the sampling routine As the routine progresses the sampler creates a log of sampling results that records pertinent information about each sample event The results include the time and date of each sample the number of pump counts occurring until liquid is detected for each sample event and any problems encountered You can retrieve results with the Display Status procedure discussed in an upcoming section You can retrieve the results in the middle of a routine or when the routine is done The results remain in the sampler s memory until you start the sampler again See the section Run State for more information Interactive State The interactive state lets you program the sampler The interactive state contains two branches the program sequence and the configure sequence Figure 3 6 dia grams the structure of the interactive state The program sequence defines the sampling routine it allows you to enter the interval between samples the number of samples in each bottle the sample size and the start time Th
224. ng Guidelines Example Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 2 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM 3 Select FLOW 4 Enter 10 as the flow pulse interval The sampler will take a sample every tenth flow pulse received 5 Select YES to multiplex samples 6 Select BOTTLES PER SAMPLE 9 Select YES Enter the start time for the sampling routine Note that the sampler may receive flow pulses before the sampling rou tine begins Any pulses received before the start time will be disregarded After this message appears briefly the sampler automatically returns to the standby state Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number This display appears after you press the START SAMPLING key to start the routine It reports the scheduled start time on the first line The second line reports the current time and date 3 32 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling When the scheduled start time arrives th
225. ng routine after the last set of bottles has been filled Display 48 Enter the size of the sample volume MAX will vary according to the number of samples per bottle and bottle size Display 50 This display appears when you have configured the controller for composite sampling by selecting 1 in Display 221 or 222 Enter the number of composite samples An entry of O instructs the sampler to take samples until a float shut off terminates the sampling routine Display 60 This display appears when you select YES in Display 242 or select DISABLE in Display 240 Enter the mea sured suction head MAX will be the smaller of the suction line length or 20 Display 70 This display appears in the program sequence when you have selected ENABLE in Display 290 Select YES to use the calibration sequence NO to omit the calibration sequence Display 80 D 4 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued This display is part of the calibration sequence Press the MANUAL SAMPLE key when a collection bottle is underneath the distributor and the suction line is in place Display 81 This display is part of the calibration sequence When it first appears it reports the programmed sample volume If the measured volume differs from the reported volume enter the measured
226. ng the need for cleaning The sampler automatically monitors pump tubing wear a tubing warning indication appears when the pump revolution count exceeds a user specified wear limit 1 3 3 Strainers 1 3 4 Bottle Configurations 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction The 8 inch ID vinyl suction lines are shipped from the factory with our standard weighted polypropylene strainer installed on one end of the suction line and a tubing coupling on the other end Additionally Teledyne Isco offers two low flow stainless steel strainers for 1 4 inch ID and inch ID suction lines For sampling from highly acidic flow streams a weighted plastic CPVC strainer is available With the 3700 Standard a number of sample containers are available for both sequential sampling and composite conver sions 24 Bottle Configurations e 350 ml glass with PTFE lined caps e 1000 ml polypropylene bottles with polyethylene foam lined caps 12 Bottle Configuration e 950 ml 1 quart glass with PTFE lined caps requires 12 bottle base e 950 ml 1 quart polypropylene with polyethylene foam lined caps requires 12 bottle base 4 Bottle Configuration e 3800 ml 1 gallon glass with PTFE lined caps requires 4 bottle locating insert for 24 bottle standard base section Single Bottle Composite Configurations e 9400 ml 2 5 gallon glass composite bottle with unlined cap requires locating insert for 24 bottle standard base section
227. ng the Control Box from the Center Section 6 3 6 2 Underside of the Control Box Cover 6 4 6 3 Main Circuit Board 6 5 6 4 Control Box Tray Removal 6 6 6 5 Distributor and Pump Gear Case Removal 6 7 6 6 Main Circuit Board Component Layout 6 11 6 7 Optical Counter PCB Component Layout 6 12 D 1 Time Line 4e Are eda Foye Poet mL Pea nen Se Baie D 1 List of Tables 1 1 Technical Specifications for the 3700 Portable Samplers 1 10 2 1 Strainers cee Pee Sale ee ee Hinds So pine Sn DA 2 5 3 1 Configure Option Functions 3 11 3 2 Bottle Volume Settings for Standard Bottle Configurations 3 40 3 3 Sampling Capabilities Through the Program Sequence 3 42 3 4 Factory Configure Option Settings 3 54 3 5 Factory Program Settings 3 55 3 6 Start Time Displays 3 64 8 7 Recommended Configurations for Storm Sampling 3 69 4 1 Flow Meter Connector Wiring 4 4 4 2 Printer Connector Wiring 4 4 4 3
228. ngths of 4 feet not 3 5 feet The controller will accept only whole numbers as suction line lengths To ensure the accuracy of the sampler you must enter a suction line length equal that of the actual line measurement When programming the sampler you must enter the inside diameter type and length of suction line used Cut the line to the shortest length feasible this aids the downhill routing Avoid loops of coiled suction line which may hold residual amounts of liquid that would cross contaminate sample volumes A shorter suction line will also extend battery life and pump tube life because the sampler will require a shorter pumping cycle to deliver the sample volume 2 4 1 Attaching Vinyl Attach vinyl suction line to the pump tubing with the tube cou Suction Line pling Two couplings are available one for each size of viny line Attach the vinyl suction line to the pump tube with the tubing coupler First screw the threaded end into the suction line until the flat surface is flush against the suction line Figure 2 1 Then push the other end of the coupler into the end of the pump tube until the other flat surface is flush against the tubing Figure 2 1 Attaching the suction line to the pump tubing 2 3 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures 2 4 2 Attaching PTFE Suction Line 2 4 3 Routing of the Suction Line 2 5 Strainers Once the coupler is attached to the pump tube removal is dif ficult and m
229. nitely even though the bottles have been filled to capacity To avoid overfilling the bot tles replace them at regular time intervals or as soon as they are filled Bottle Volume The sampler will accept bottle volumes between 100 ml and 30 000 ml It uses the bottle volume to cal culate the range of acceptable sample volumes in the sample volume input display and to check for probable overfill when running a sampling routine Table 3 2 lists Teledyne Isco s standard bottle sizes for composite samplers When using the standard bottles enter the bottle volume setting listed in the third column of the table We have adjusted the recommended bottle sizes downward Using the lower adjusted volume helps prevent overfilling If you are using 3 39 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines a nonstandard bottle enter a bottle volume smaller than the actual bottle capacity This will help prevent overfilling There are approximately 3 785 ml per gallon Table 3 2 Bottle Volume Settings for Standard Bottle Configurations 3 40 Bottle Configuration Bottle Size Bottle Volume Setting Compatibility 24 polypropylene 1000 ml 1000 S 24 polyethylene 500 ml 500 C 24 glass 350 ml 350 S 12 polypropylene glass 945 ml 945 S 12 polypropylene glass 300 ml 300 C 4 glass and polyethylene 1 gal 3800 S 1 glass and polyethylene 2 5 gal 9400 S C 1 polyethylene 4 gal 15 000 S NOTE
230. o types of time pacing uniform or nonuniform If you select uniform time intervals the settings for time intervals are identical to the time intervals entered in the basic programming mode Nonuniform times allow you to pace the sampler at irregular intervals Before you enter nonuniform time intervals you must specify either minutes or clock times in the Nonuniform Times configure option You can enter nonuniform intervals in two ways The first method allows you to define the interval between each sample event in minutes For example you can program the sampler to take sample 2 after an interval of 10 minutes sample 3 after an interval of 30 minutes sample 4 after an interval of 60 minutes and so on Sample 1 would be taken at the start time The second method allows you to enter a specific time and date for each sample event For example with non uniform time pacing you can collect samples at specific times and dates at irregular intervals 6 a m on April 15 noon on April 15 7 a m on April 16 and 1 p m on April 16 If you have several sequences of nonuniform times you can use the program storage feature to save the programs using each sequence The extended Sample Distribution section expands the multi plexing capabilities of the sampler Both the bottles per sample and samples per bottle multiplexing are available however the procedure used to program them differs slightly from the pro cedure used in the basic progra
231. of the base Remove the retaining ring from the base by squeezing the ends of the ring together and lifting the ring out of the base Plastic Bottles The retaining ring for the plastic bottles in the portable sampler rests on top of the slanted portion of the bottles Mildew resistant polypropylene jacketed draw cords attached to the bottom of the base hold it in place Each of these draw cords is hooked to a corresponding location on the retaining ring Detach the plastic retaining ring from the base by disconnecting the draw cords from the hooks on the ring Once the ring is removed you can lift the bottles out of the base Always use the retaining rings in the 3700 Standard especially when using ice to cool the samples The melt water from the ice will cause the plastic bottles to float blocking the movement of the distributor arm Compact Sampler Bottles In the 3700 Compact the tub is molded to the contour of the bottles including the composite bottles This eliminates the need for using the bottle inserts to position the bottles in the tub You can cool the samples by placing cubed or crushed ice in the center of the base section Users can either dump ice into the center of the base section or place it in a plastic bag For the most uniform cooling it is best to let the melt water from the ice run between the sample bottles creating an ice bath The quantity of ice used is dependent upon the required sample tem perature
232. oming sample event If the bottle set consisted of four bottles the first line of the display would read BOTTLES 1 4 The number of flow pulses remaining to the sample event is dis played on the second line The second line of the display changes This display shows one pulse remaining until the sample event 3 85 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Extended Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling Continued When the pump begins to run forward to deliver the sample volume the second line appears After the pump completes the sample delivery it reverses to purge the liquid from the pump tube past the liquid detector The suction line is not completely purged instead the liquid is pumped just past the liquid detector At the end of the pump tube purge the distributor moves to the next bottle of the set The display remains unchanged until the distributor relocates to the next bottle of the set As the distributor moves to the next bottle the bottle number reported in the display changes to indicate the bottle number The message PUMPING 800 ml will remain on the display When the distributor reaches the correct position over the current bottle the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume When the delivery is completed the pump reverses to complete the post sample purge At the end of the post sam
233. on on Page 3 13 On off When in the standby state this key simply shuts the sampler off Pump Forward and Pump Reverse While in the standby state pressing the PUMP FORWARD or PUMP REVERSE key will cause the pump to run continuously in the chosen direction The pump will run until you press the STOP key See Page 3 13 for more details 3 97 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 98 Manual Sample You can take manual samples in standby by pressing the MANUAL SAMPLE key After you press the MANUAL SAMPLE key the sampler will deliver the programmed sample volume to the bottle currently under the distributor A manual sample delivers the sample volume currently entered as a pro grammed setting and includes the pre sample and post sample purges It will also include any programmed rinses and retries The sampling process can be stopped with the STOP key at any time While the sample is being delivered the sampler displays a message similar to that illustrated below The second line will not appear until the pump begins to pump forward to deliver the sample The display will revert to standby after the manual sample has been delivered Next Bottle Pressing the NEXT BOTTLE key will cause the dis tributor to move to the next bottle If the distributor is positioned over the last bottle it will move to bottle position 1 The sampler will display the distributor s location as illustrated below After a s
234. ond bottle groups Like the delay to second group sample the during after delay determines when the sampler begins sampling for the second bottle group Because the flow paced sampling can consume unpredictable amounts of time the storm routine must use two specific events to mark the beginning of the flow intervals These events are the time the sampler is enabled and the time the sampler completes the first bottle group If you want the sampler to fill the second bottle group during the first bottle group select DURING from Display 16 The sampler will begin counting flow pulses when the sampler is enabled If the sampler is enabled at the start time the sampler starts counting flow pulses at the start time If you want the sampler to fill the second group after the sampler fills the first bottle group select AFTER The sampler will begin counting flow pulses after it fills the first bottle group 3 78 START SAMPLING Start Time Delay to Start Time Determined by start time entry or start time delay e Disable Signal Ignored 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Sampler enabled at Delay to First Storm Sampling _ start time Timed Sample Routine Sampler enabled Sampler disabled at Sampler Disabled Delay to First Storm Sampling _ start time Timed Sample Routine Figure 3 18 Start
235. onuniform clock times and dates for each sample event Display 26 Enter the number of samples to be taken at each interval The total quantity you enter will be 1 fewer than the total number of samples because the first sample taken at the start time counts as 1 For example if you want to take 19 samples the first 6 at 20 minute intervals the next 9 at 30 minute intervals and the remaining 3 at 45 minute inter vals first enter a quantity of 6 at 20 minutes 9 at 30 minutes and 3 at 45 minutes Figure D 1 shows a time line for the sampling routine Display 27 This display appears for samplers configured for 2 8 and 24 bottles Display s 221 or 222 with the 3700 Portable or 24 for the 3700 Compact Display 22X It does not appear for samplers configured for a single bottle In the basic programming mode it follows Display 36 In the extended programming mode it follows one of the four sample inter val entry displays Display s 21 22 26 27 Enter the number of bottles to receive a sample volume at each sample event Display 30 In the basic programming mode this display appears when you have selected SAMPLES PER BOTTLE in Display 36 In the extended programming mode it appears when the sampler is configured for 2 8 or 24 bottles and there is only one bottle set Enter the number of samples you want deposited in each bottle Display 31 Select YES if you want
236. or it is important that its lid is tightly attached to its base Be sure to tighten the two captive thumbscrews tightly 6 10 11 12 13 Feed the free end of the tube down through the pump tube port in the center section Turn the center section over again and feed the end of the tube into the coil spring Pull the tube through the coil spring and carefully insert the tube into the body of the distributor arm Feed the end of the tube into the outlet of the distributor arm so that the end of the tube is flush to 1 16 inch below the end of the arm Reinstall the suction line as described in Attaching the Suction Line in Section 2 Reinstall the distributor arm on the distributor shaft and screw in the distributor arm retaining nut Be sure that the retaining nut is tight Inspect the length of exposed tube under the center sec tion There should be no excessive slack in this tube it should continuously slope downward from the bottom of the center section to the point where it enters the distribu tor arm This prevents low spots in the tube which might not completely drain of sample liquid If there is excessive slack adjust the length of the tubing under the center sec tion by pulling tube out of the pump tube port Reset the pump tube count to zero Refer to the discussion of the Tubing Life configure option in Section 3 5 7 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance 5 4 Suct
237. oting 6 8 6 3 1 Circuit Boards 3223 em mir ds BER ek ee Ee EH EA ee 6 9 6 3 2 Main Board sement Wh eue eed we ee 6 9 6 3 3 Pump Control Board 6 12 6 4 Sample Event Cycle and Delivery of Sample Volumes 6 13 6 4 1 Volumetric Determination 6 13 3700 Portable Samplers Table of Contents 6 4 2 Sample Delivery 6 13 6 4 8 Sample Volume Variation 6 14 Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists A 1 Standard Portable 3700 A 2 A 2 Compact Portable 3700 A 6 A 3 3700 Controller A 8 Appendix B Accessories B 1 General Accessories B 1 B 2 Bottles Caps and Retaining Rings B 1 B 3 Suction Lines and Strainers B 2 B 4 Power Sources B 3 B 5 Interfacing Equipment B 3 Appendix C General Safety Procedures C 1 Practical Safety Precautions C 1 C 2 Lethal Atmospheres in Sewers C 4 C 8 Hazardous Gas
238. ou are using bulk suction line to replace the old line detach the old line from the tube coupling and remove the strainer Cut the new suction line to the desired length in 1 foot increments The line must be between 3 and 99 feet long To ensure accurate sample volumes be sure that the line is cut in 1 foot increments and that the line length is correctly entered in the Suction Line configure option Screw the strainer into the new suction line You can now install the new suction line in the pump as described in Section 2 4 1 5 4 2 PTFE Suction Line Remove the suction line from the pump by loosening the clamp that secures the line to the pump tube and pulling the suction line out of the pump tube If you must use a new suction line either with or without the optional stainless steel strainer install it as described in Section 2 5 To install the optional stainless steel strainer heat the end of the suction line to make it more flexible then carefully screw the strainer s threaded con nector into the suction line Replacement PTFE Line Teledyne Isco offers 3 s inch ID PTFE suction line in lengths of 10 and 25 feet 5 8 5 5 Internal Desiccant 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance A humidity indicator labeled INTERNAL CASE HUMIDITY is located in the lower left corner of the control panel It indicates the amount of moisture present inside the control box The paper indicator is blue when the control box
239. ound Strap Screw Screw gt 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing Ground Strap Unscrew the four screws and the ground straps to remove the distributor gear case Figure 6 5 Distributor and Pump Gear Case Removal 6 2 Precautions for Servicing CMOS Circuitry Most of the circuitry in the 3700 Portable Samplers is made up of CMOS components Because of the oxide gate structure of these devices they are extremely susceptible to destruction caused by the discharge of static electricity through their inputs Because of this risk you must take certain precautions when working on these circuits CAUTION Hazard of Static Electricity The voltage levels present from static buildup from walking over carpeted floors movement of woolen or synthetic clothes over chair seats workbenches etc are high enough to destroy CMOS circuitry when you are performing repair work Ideally all tools soldering irons etc should be grounded and you should conduct all work on a grounded metal workbench with a grounding strap worn around your wrist Obviously in field repair situations such precautions are impractical However you must avoid certain extreme hazards 1 Never perform any work in a room with a carpeted floor 2 Always roll up the sleeves of work clothes so that your arms are in contact with the working surface 3 Avoid using a work surface made of an extremely good insulator Avoid laminated counter
240. outines easily and efficiently The extended programming mode expands the versatility of the sampler by providing options that let you create complex sampling routines The LCD not only prompts you through the programming process but also allows you to closely monitor a sampling routine as it is executed The LCD shows pertinent information about the routine for example the time of the next sample and notifies you of any problems encountered during the routine As the routine progresses the sampler logs stores key information about the results of the routine The results include the start time any halt and resume times time of samples and cause of any missed samples This information is accessible during a routine or after a sampling routine is finished You can view this information from the sampler s display or retrieve the infor mation with the field printer or a laptop computer running Teledyne Isco s Samplink software The 3700s are designed to collect as many as 24 separate sequential discrete samples and are fully programmable for true composite sampling You can collect both sequential and composite samples at user definable time intervals time pacing or at equal flow volume intervals using flow pulse inputs from an external flow meter flow pacing You can set the flow interval from 1 to 9 999 flow pulses Both samplers offer two types of time pacing uniform and non uniform You can take uniform time paced sampl
241. pin E of the flow meter connector Select PULSE to send a 3 second event mark signal Display 330 Event Mark configure option This setting appears when you select CONTINUOUS SIGNAL in Display 330 Select PUMP CYCLE to transmit the event mark signal during the entire pump cycle including any programmed rinses and retries Select FWD PUMPING ONLY to send the signal when the pump is delivering a sample volume only Display 331 Event Mark configure option This setting appears when you select PULSE in Display 330 Select PURGE to transmit an event mark signal to a flow meter at the beginning of the pre sample purge Select FWD PUMPING to transmit a signal when the pump switches forward to deliver the sample volume Display 332 Purge Counts configure option Enter the number of pre sample pump counts needed to purge the suction line This value is set to 150 when the controller is reinitialized Display 340 Purge Counts configure option Enter the number of post sample pump counts needed to purge the suction line The Controller derives the number that initially appears in this display from the suction line ID and length entered in Dis play 230 and 232 Display 341 D 9 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued Tubing Life configure option This informational display communi
242. ple event for the second bottle group Display 17 This display follows Display 11 when you have selected NONUNIFORM Select YES to modify the existing non uniform intervals Select NO to leave the nonuniform intervals unchanged Display 20 I EY In the basic programming mode this display appears after you have selected TIME in Display 10 In the extended programming mode this display appears when you have selected UNIFORM in Display 11 Enter the uniform time interval You need to make 2 entries The first entry sets the hours the second sets the minutes Display 21 This display follows Display 10 when you have selected FLOW Enter the flow pulse interval Display 22 This display follows Display 15 Use this display to enter the number of timed sample events in a storm program Display 23 This display follows Display 23 Enter the time interval between time paced sample events in a storm program Display 24 D 2 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continued This display follows Display 20 when you select YES to modify the nonuniform time interval sequence Enter the number of sample events to occur at nonuniform time intervals MAX varies according to the bottle size entered in Display 223 Display 25 This display follows Display 25 Enter the n
243. ple purge the display changes to indicate the bottle numbers of the next bottle set The display will change as it receives each flow pulse The cycle is repeated until the sampling routine is completed When the routine is complete the display will indicate the status of the routine DONE the number of sample events and the current time and date In Example Flow Paced Sampling Time Based Bottle Sets samples are to be taken at intervals of 1 000 flow pulses Samples will be multiplexed by placing 100 ml sample volumes into two bottles at each sample event To avoid missing any samples the sampling routine starts immediately after you press the start sampling key To place the bottle set changes at the top of the hour the sampler will be allowed to take samples until 12 00 the time of the first bottle set change After the first change bottle sets will change every two hours NOTE The number of samples in each bottle set will vary as the flow rate varies If at least one sample is desired in each bottle the sampler should be directed to take a sample at the start and switch times See the section Flow Mode Sampling which describes this option 3 86 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 10 11 12 Example Flow Paced Sampling Time Based Bottle Sets Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state Access the program sequence by selec
244. pler waits until another sample event is initiated and the cycle begins again at Step 1 This process continues until the last bottle has been filled at which time the sampler automatically shuts off The following section briefly describes the method by which the sample volume is determined The 3700 uses a peristaltic pump to transport the sample from the source to the sample bottle When compared with other suction lift sample gathering methods the peristaltic pump has numerous advantages sim plicity reliability no requisite metering chamber an easy to clean design etc The 3700 Sampler determines the volumetric delivery of its peri staltic pump by electronically counting revolutions of the pump rotor Each revolution of the pump rotor corresponds to a fixed number of pump counts and a certain volume of sample liquid However the volume of liquid delivered by one revolution of the pump rotor changes with the suction head and the type of suction line At each sample event the 3700 liquid detection system automatically compensates for changes in suction head and adjusts the volume delivered for each revolution of the pump Thus for a given type of suction line each revolution of the pump rotor results in the delivery of a known amount of sample volume There are three parts to the sample pumping portion of a sample event suction line fill liquid detection and sample volume delivery The sampler counts the number of pump re
245. posite base has double walled construction with polyurethane foam insulation Figure 4 1 Composite Sampling Float and Float Cage Installed on Center Section 4 2 4 2 4 Programming and Configuring for Composite Sampling 4 3 Connections to External Devices 4 3 1 Isco Flow Meters and Flow Loggers 3700 Portable Samplers Section 4 Options and Interfacing Equipment Prepare the tub for composite sampling by installing the sample container No locating deck is required for the composite tub locating depressions are integrally molded into the tub You can then attach the composite base to the center section Note When cooling the samples with ice the melt water may cause the bottle to float when you remove the center section After converting the sampler be sure to change the bottle number and size settings in the Bottles and Sizes configure option Refer to Event Mark and Bottle Signal Output You must reprogram the controller for composite sampling because changing the bottle setting will change the program sequence Refer to Programming Introduction for information on pro gramming the controller The 3700 Series Samplers can collect samples on a flow paced basis using flow inputs from an external flow meter The 3700 requires a 5 to 15 VDC pulse of at least 25 millisecond duration to register a flow pulse Open channel flow meters are con nected to the sampler by attaching a flow meter connect cable to the flow meter conne
246. prop erties and because it does not contain any organic materials Nonmedical grade silicone rubber tubing can contain organic vulcanizing agents During vulcanizing these agents are con verted into compounds which can leach into the sample The medical grade silicone tubing Teledyne Isco supplies for use with the 3700 Sampler will not contribute any organic material to the sample WARNING Be sure the power is disconnected from the unit before you exchange the pump tubing The pump is extremely powerful If the sampler activates the pump while you are manipulating the tubing within the pump you may be seriously injured The pump tubing is extremely durable However the constant mechanical strain placed on the tubing by the peristaltic action of the pump eventually causes the tubing to fatigue and fail Remove the cover periodically to inspect the pump tubing for wear inside the pump Check the tubing for cracks where the pump roller compresses the tubing Replace the worn out pump tubing with a new pump tube if necessary The importance of regular tubing replacement cannot be over stated The key is to replace the tube before failure not after When a pump tube ruptures grit and other abrasive debris can be driven into the pump shaft seal Over time this abrasive material will degrade the pump seal jeopardizing the IPX7 NEMA 4x and NEMA 6 rating of the controller Failure to maintain the pump tube may result in permanent da
247. r conventional routines you can use the extended pro gramming mode for either conventional or more complex rou tines Storm programming is available through the extended programming mode Table 3 3 summarizes the sampling features according to the programming mode in the program sequence Table 3 1 summa rizes the features available in the configure sequence Display 250 Table 3 3 Sampling Capabilities Through the Program Sequence Pacing Mode Feature Time Pacing Uniform Time Intervals Basic amp Extended Samples taken at regular time intervals from 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes Nonuniform Intervals in Minutes Time Pacing Extended Samples taken at irregular time intervals by specifying the time and date of each sample You can enter dates as far as one ee Clock Time month in advance of the current date Time Pacing Extended Samples taken at irregular time intervals by specifying the amount of time in minutes between each sample You can enter intervals from 1 to 999 minutes Flow Pacing Basic amp Extended Samples taken at regular flow intervals The sampler will totalize flow intervals of 1 to 9 999 pulses Distribution Sequential Basic amp Extended One sample volume placed in each bottle Samples per Bottle Multiplexing Basic amp Extended More than one sample volume placed in each bottle You can switch bottles after a specified number of samples have been depo
248. r sample multiplexing samples per bottle multi plexing and multiple bottle compositing These distribution schemes are available for both bottle groups Because STORM programming is part of the extended programming mode the sample distribution displays used Display s 30 and 31 are identical to other extended mode programming routines Refer to Example Time Paced Multiplexed samples per bottle Sampling for samples per bottle multiplexing Example Extended Flow Paced Multiplexed bottles per sample Sampling for bottles per sample multiplexing and Example Flow Paced Sam pling Time Based Bottle Sets for multiple bottle compositing To enter a sample volume for the first bottle group enter the volume in Display 50 The second section contains input displays for the second bottle group It includes displays that e Set the pacing for the second bottle group e Determine when the sampler begins filling the second bottle group during the same time period as the first bottle group or after it fills the first bottle group e Set the maximum flow interval e Determine the sample distribution for the second bottle group samples per bottle multiplexing bottles per sample multiplexing or multiple bottle compositing 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines After you ve completed the entries for the first bottle group the sampler will present the following message This message marks the beginning of the se
249. r to enter the interactive state While at an input display press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept an entered value or a blinking option and direct the sampler to proceed to the next step Numeric Keys The numeric keys consist of 10 digit keys a key and a key You use the digit keys to enter quantities and the arrow keys to move through the configure option list or program options e Left Arrow Press the left arrow key to select one of two or more program options displayed when the sampler is in the interactive state When more than one numeric entry is displayed for example the hours and minutes of a time setting you can use the left arrow key to step back to a previously entered value When entering a number use the left arrow key to erase the most recently entered digit It is also used to step through display status information and configure option list e Right Arrow Use the right arrow key to select 1 of 2 or more program options in an input display You can also press it to step through display status information and configure option list 8 6 3 Displays There are two types of displays displays that communicate infor mation about the sampler s status and displays that request input In many cases you must respond to a display with the keypad Informational Displays Informational displays communicate information about the sampler s status For example when the sampler completes a sampling program a di
250. ractically of sludge odorless taste less Sulfur SO Colorless pun 2 26 Inflammation of 50 10 At bottom can Industrial Detectable Dioxide gent odor Suffo the eyes 400 to to combine with waste taste and odor cating corrosive 500 ppm imme 100 water to form combus at low concen poisonous diately fatal sulfurous acid tion com tration non flammable mon air pollutant Toluene C5H12 Colorless ben 3 14 At 200 500 ppm 200 100 1 27 7 0 At bottom Solvent Combustible to zene like odor headache nau gas indicator CoH 29 sea bad taste lassitude Turpentine CyoHig Colorless Char 4 84 Eye irritation 100 At bottom Solvent 1 Detectable acteristic odor Headache diz used in odor at low ziness nausea paint concentration irritation of the s kidneys 2 Combustible gas indica tor Xylene CgHi9 Colorless flam 3 66 Narcotic in high 100 1 1 7 0 At bottom Solvent Combustible mable concentrations gas indicator less toxic than benzene Percentages shown represent volume of gas in air For concentration over 0 3 Mostly methane and carbon dioxide with small amounts of hydrogen nitrogen hydrogen sulfide and oxygen occasionally traces of carbon monoxide C 9 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index M Note To access the display number press the STOP key while the sampler displays the screen in question The
251. re the interval is longer than the duration of the sampling cycle For truly representative sampling the interval in either time or flow paced sampling should be longer than the duration of the sampling cycle If the intervals are too short you will not miss any sample events although some events will occur at improper times You can determine the duration of the cycle by programming the sampler with the desired settings pressing the manual sample key and timing the cycle When programming the sampler for flow pacing you must enter the number of pulses that make up the flow interval If the flow meter has been set to send a pulse once every 1 000 gallons you can program the sampler to collect a sample once every 1 000 gallons by entering a flow pulse interval of 1 To collect a sample once every 50 000 gal lons you would enter a sample interval of 50 pulses Appendix E discusses some of the calculations needed when determining flow pulse intervals 3 Enter the Sample Distribution settings The settings in the Sample Distribution section allow you to perform sequen tial or multiplexed sampling The first display of the Sam ple Distribution section asks whether you want to multiplex samples If you want simple sequential sampling one sample per bottle select NO The sampler will then prompt you for the Sample Volume settings If you want to use bottles per sample or samples per bottle multiplexing select YES
252. red and return to standby Example Time Paced Sampling Uniform Intervals shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at uniform time intervals of 30 minutes starting at 8 00 a m tomorrow placing one 500 ml sample in each bottle The examples throughout this section demonstrate the steps used to program the sampler for several different sampling rou tines in the extended programming mode Each programming example concludes with the run state displays that appear for that routine Before programming a sampler in the extended programming mode the sampler must be configured for extended program ming Refer to the section Programming Mode for a discussion of the Programming Mode configure option Example Checking the Configure Option Settings shows the steps required to access the Programming Mode option Example Time Paced Sampling Uniform Intervals 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 2 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM 3 Select TIME 4 Select UNIFORM 3 80 S 3700 Portable Samplers ection 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Sampling Uniform Intervals Continued 5 Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry 6 Enter 30 to set the minutes entry to 30 7 Enter 1
253. rm Event Sample A bottle group can consist of one or more bottles Thus the Distribution Schemes first flush sample can be a large sample delivered to a single bottle or distributed to several bottles with a multiplexing scheme The remaining samples can be distributed to the second bottle group sequentially or according to any of the three available multiplexing distribution schemes bottles per sample samples per bottle or multiple bottle compositing By dividing the samples into multiple bottles you can analyze the pollutant concentration from each phase of the storm event To obtain an analysis of a composite sample combine the contents of the bottles into a composite for the grab sample and a composite for the flow weighted samples Figure 3 5 shows a storm distribution scheme that combines time paced bottles per sample multiplexing with flow paced samples per bottle multiplexing The program has allocated bottles 1 2 and 3 for the timed grab samples and bottles 4 through 24 for flow paced samples At each time paced sample event the sampler places a single sample in the first bottle group bottles 1 2 and 3 Each bottle of the second group receives two samples per bottle Bottle Number 12 of 24 Bottles Shown Sample Event Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ES SSS SSS SS SS 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 4 1 2 2 2 3 5 7 9
254. ro 3 9 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines gramming mode the less frequently used features have been sep arated into the extended mode to simplify the programming process Although the basic and extended program sequences vary in detail you can divide both into four sections Sample Pacing interval between samples Sample Distribution number of samples in each bottle Sample Volume sample size in ml and Key Times start times or in the extended mode stop and resume times These sections are noted in the Program Sequence section of the diagram shown in Figure 8 6 STANDBY 9 50 34 12 SEP 04 Display 1 Program PROGRAM CONFIGURE Configure SAMPLER PROGRAM SEQUENCE CONFIGURE SEQUENCE L Set Clock x Sample Pacing gt Bottles and Sizes i Suction Line i NY oe Sample Distribution Liquid Detector i Programming Mode i lt Sample Volumes and Suction Head i Load Stored Program i Save Stored Program l N7 Flow Mode Sampling i Key Times i i j i i Nonuniform Time Calibrate Sampler Sampling Stop Resume Start Time Delay en ee Enable Pin Event Mark PROGRAMMING Purge Counts SEQUENCE Tubing Life Program Lock Sampler ID Run Diagnostics Exit Configuration Indicates Extended Programming Mode X STANDBY 9 54 40 12 SEP 04 Figure 3 6 In
255. roduce in a chamber with high turbulence a concentration of 300 PPM ELS in the air This is considered to be a lethal concentration Many people have died from HS not only in sewers and industries but also from swamps and from hot springs In one resort area at least five persons died from HS poisoning before the people were ready to admit that HS is not a therapeutic agent Hardly a year passes in the U S without a sewer fatality from HS as well as deaths elsewhere in the world The presence of HS in a sewer atmosphere is easily deter mined A bellows and ampoule type of tester is very satisfactory for the purpose even though it is only crudely quantitative When using a tester of this type do not bring the air to the ampoule by way of a tube as this may change the HS concen tration Hang the ampoule in the air to be tested with a suction tube to the bulb or bellows Lead acetate paper is very useful as a qualitative indicator It cannot be used to estimate the amount of sulfide but it will quickly turn black in an atmosphere containing only a tenth of a lethal concentration Electrodes or other similar electrical indicating devices for HS in air have been marketed Some of them are known to be unre liable and we know of none that have proved dependable Do not use one unless you check it at frequent intervals against air con taining known HS concentrations A supposed safety device that is unreliable is worse than non
256. rred count Program Lock 360 Select ENABLE or DISABLE as preferred Sampler ID 365 Enter appropriate ID Run Diagnostics No setting required 3 70 3 13 Programming the Sampler for a Storm Routine 3 13 1 First Section First Bottle Group Settings 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines The extended programming mode contains two program sequences The first sequence contains the displays for time and flow paced routines The second sequence contains the displays for STORM paced routines Figures 3 10 and 3 11 show first sequence displays Figure 3 12 shows the STORM displays The storm input displays are divided into three sections The first section contains the displays that control the pacing and dis tribution to the first bottle group The second section contains the displays that control the pacing and distribution for the second bottle group The third section controls the start time for the routine and may include calibration and manual suction head displays The first section contains the input displays that e Set a delay to the first sample event of the first bottle group e Set the time pacing for the first bottle group e Allocate the bottles for the first bottle group e Determine sample distribution for the first bottle group sequential samples per bottle multiplexing bottles per sample multiplexing or multi bottle compos iting 3 71 3 72 3700 Portable Sample
257. rs Section 3 Programming Guidelines AFTER Start Time First Bottle Group ___ Delay to First Group Sample j T F F 5 gt LI LJ PA Second Bottle Group lt j I i Final time paced sample Start Time DURING Flow interval for second bottle group starts here First Bottle Group ___ Delay to First p Group Sample Second Bottle Group F gt __ pF E Ff ij F Flow interval starts here y Figure 3 16 Storm Sampling Flow Pacing for the Second Bottle Group Start Time _ Delay to First _ Group Sample D Delay to D Start Time _ Delay to First i Second Group Samples 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines First Bottle Group T i T Second Bottle Group E T H T 7 T 7 gt Second bottle group filled during first bottle group The delay to second group sample is greater than the delay to first group sample First Bottle Group Group Sample D Delay to Second L T E Group Sample 2 Final time paced sample of first bottle group D Second Bottle Group Figure 3 17 Storm Sampling Time Pacing for the Second Bottle Group The TIME MODE message marks the beginning of the first section This message is followed by Display 15 below Display 15 Use this display to set amount of time between the time the sampler is enabled
258. rtable Samplers Section 1 Introduction 1 2 3 STORM Sampling In samples per bottle multiplexing more than one sample volume can be placed in a bottle Samples per bottle multiplexing allows you to collect a series of small composite samples If you deposit several samples in each bottle the contents rep resent an average of the flow stream during the sampling period In bottles per sample multiplexing you can place equal sample volumes in as many as 24 bottles at each sample event Bottles per sample multiplexing is ideal for situations where you need identical sets of samples when you need to use more than one preservative for example You can multiplex both time paced and flow paced sequential samples The third type of multiplexing multiple bottle compositing is accessible through the extended programming mode Mul tiple bottle compositing places more than one sample volume into more than one bottle At each sample event a sample volume is placed in several bottles in sets of as many as 24 bottles Multiple bottle compositing combines bottles per samples multiplexing and samples per bottle multi plexing it is applicable to situations where you need a series of identical sets of samples You can also use multiple bottle com positing when you need a series of larger volume composite samples by taking several smaller samples and distributing them over several bottles In the extended programming mode you can switch multiple
259. s I time interval Figure 3 15 Start Time Diagram for Nonuniform Time Routines 3 66 One sample event occurs to compensate for skipped samples 3 12 Stormwater Sampling 3 12 1 Storm Sampling Checklist 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Many stormwater runoff monitoring permits require a first flush grab sample within the first 30 minutes of the storm event and a time or flow paced composite sample during the remainder of the event The 3700 Sampler s STORM pacing is ideal for moni toring storm events Storm pacing allows you to e Divide the sampler s bottles into two groups The first bottle group receives the first flush grab sample The grab sample is always a time paced sample The second bottle group receives either a flow paced or time paced sample e Collect samples for the second bottle group after collecting the first flush samples or collect samples for both groups at the same time See Figures 3 16 and 3 17 e Distribute sample volumes to both bottle groups sequen tially or in any of the three multiplexing schemes bottles per sample samples per bottle or multiple bottle compositing e Use an Isco 4200 Series Flow Meter or a 4100 Series Flow Logger to enable or disable the sampler according to the level or flow rate of the flow stream or to specific amount of rainfall e Use a maximum flow interval setting to terminate a STORM routine that uses flow paced sampling The maxi
260. s and advance to the next display 3 23 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 10 Wis 12 13 14 Example Checking the Configure Option Settings Continued To verify the Bottles and Sizes settings press the ENTER PROGRAM key The display shown in Step 5 will appear Select PORTABLE or REFRIG depending upon which model you have Enter PORTABLE for either the 3700 Standard or Compact For the purposes of this example select 24 when you are using the 24 bottle base Use the arrow keys until 24 blinks then press the ENTER PROGRAM key Select 1 when you are using a single bottle for composite sampling Enter the bottle size here Enter 350 for the 350 ml glass bottles 1000 for plastic bottles for example Press the ENTER PROGRAM key If you enter a number that exceeds the maximum standard bottle size 15 000 the message WARNING STANDARD BTL VOLUME EXCEEDED will display for a short time The sampler will then prompt you to confirm the volume entered This prompt is displayed in Step 9 Select YES if you want to use the nonstandard bottle volume Select NO if you want to revise the entry The display shown in step 8 will reappear use it to enter the revised bottle volume Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry and advance to step 10 Press the ENTER PRO
261. s been inhibited while running a routine will move to the next bottle set when enabled if at least one sample volume has been deposited in the current bottle set This is true for both time switched and count switched routines and for bottles sets composed of one or more bottles A sampler that has been inhibited while running a time switched routine will advance to the next bottle or bottle set regardless of the number of time switches that elapse while the sampler is inhibited 3 49 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 9 15 Event Mark 3 50 If the bottle sets were switched every two hours and the sampler has been inhibited for six hours the restarted routine will begin with the next bottle set The routine may not continue with the bottle set that would have been used had the sampler not been inhibited The Event Mark option configures the sampler to send an event mark to an interfaced flow meter or other equipment The sampler will supply a variable duration pulse of up to 700 mA at 12 V on pin E of the flow meter connector Four types of signals can be sent e a pulse at the beginning of the pre sample purge e a pulse at the beginning of forward pumping only e a continuous signal during the entire pump cycle e a continuous signal during forward pumping only The event mark includes a signal sent on pin D which is inter preted and recorded by an Isco flow meter as the bottle number s for the sample ev
262. s during that time interval For example assume that the average flow is 2 5 MGD and it is desired to collect a sample every 30 minutes The flow increment between samples is calculated 2 5 MGD 2 500 000 GAL DAY 2 500 000 GAL DAY X 1 DAY 24 HR X 1 HR 60 MIN 1736 GAL MIN 736 GAL MIN X 30 MIN SAMPLE 52 080 GAL SAMPLE Thus the desired flow increment between samples is approxi mately 52 000 gallons Number of Samples Known Alternatively if the total number of samples to be collected over the total sampling period is known the flow increment between samples can be deter mined by calculating how much total flow will occur during the sampling period and dividing this by the total number of samples to be collected For example assume that the average flow is 1 75 MGD that the composite sampling period is 2 days and that it is desired to collect 100 individual samples The flow increment between samples is calculated 1 75 MGD 1 750 000 GAL DAY 1 750 000 GAL DAY X 2 DAYS 3 500 000 GAL 3 500 000 GAL 100 SAMPLES 35 000 GAL SAMPLE Thus the desired flow increment between samples is approxi mately 35 000 gallons E 1 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix E Calculating Flow Increment Between Samples E 2 Calculation of Number of Flow Pulses Once the desired flow increment between samples is known the number of flow pulses to be programmed into the sampler may be calculated assuming that the volume of the flow pulses
263. s the bottle number which is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The second line displays the scheduled time for the next event on the left The current time is displayed on the right The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done J 1 When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date Example Storm Sampling illustrates how to program a 24 bottle sampler to allocate six bottles to the first bottle group The remaining 18 bottles allocated to the second bottle group will be used for flow weighted samples The sampler delays the first group 25 minutes after it is enabled For the first bottle group the sampler will take two samples with a 5 minute interval between each sample event At the first sample event bottles 1 through 3 will each receive 900 ml each bottles per sample multiplexing At the second timed event bottles 4 through 6 will receive 900 ml each The sampler will fill the second bottle group with flow paced samples during the same time as the second bottle group At each sample event a single bottle in the second bottle group will receive a 400 ml sample Each bottle will receive samples from two sample events samples per bottle multiplexing 3 94 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example
264. sited or after a specified time period Bottles per Sample Multiplexing Basic amp Extended Sample volumes placed in more than one bottle at each sample event Multiple Bottle Compositing Extended More than one sample volume placed in a set of bottles You can switch bottle sets after a specified number of samples have been deposited or after a specified time period Volumes and Accuracy Sample Volume Basic amp Extended You can enter volumes from 10 to 9 990 ml Suction Head Basic amp Extended You can enter suction heads from 1 to 20 feet 3 42 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Table 3 3 Sampling Capabilities Through the Program Sequence Continued Calibration Basic amp Extended You can calibrate sample volumes if desired Key Times Start Times Basic amp Extended You can enter specific start times for both time paced and flow paced routines If you do not enter a start time Start Time Delay is used First Switch Time Extended Bottles can be switched after specified time intervals After the routine starts the first switch time allows the first bottle or bottle set to receive samples for a partial interval After the first switch the remaining sets will receive samples for full time intervals This allows you to place the sampler on schedule Stop Resume Times Extended You can perform intermittent sampling by d
265. source is also reported when the sample was taken at a programmed stop time Two different configure option settings control this event the Sample Upon Disable setting in the Enable Pin configure option and the Sample at Stop setting in the Sampling Stop Resume configure option The probable cause of any missed sample is reported after the sample number source display A missed sample display is illus trated below Twelve causes are tracked and reported Pump STOP Key Hit The sampler was halted with the stop key during the sample event Pump Jammed The sampler was unable to take the sample because the pump jammed Started Too Late The sampling routine was started after the programmed start time for the first sample This message is reported for all samples skipped because of an expired start time Program Halted The sampling routine was interrupted by the STOP or EXIT PROGRAM key when the sample event was to occur Power Lost The sampler was unable to take the sample because the sampler s power source was disconnected 3 105 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 18 Run State 3 106 Sampler Inhibited The sampler was prevented from taking the sample by an inhibit signal sent to the sampler by a flow meter or a liquid level actuator Distributor Jammed The sampler was unable to take the sample because the distributor jammed Probable Overflow Overflow is determined
266. splay appears only when you specify a Portable sampler in the first display e The third display sets the number of bottles 1 2 4 8 12 24 for Refrigerated Samplers e The fourth display sets the bottle volume Because the 3700 Series Standard and Compact Samplers use the same control box you specify the type of unit as POR TABLE You should not specify REFRIG unless you move the control box to a refrigerated base Display 220 Bottle options If you specify PORTABLE in the previous display you will be able to specify a 1 4 12 or 24 bottle config uration The sampler comes configured for the number of bottles ordered with the sampler Change this configuration setting whenever you change bottle sets Display 221 The 2 and 8 bottle options are available only if you have a refrigerated base See the instruction manual for the 3700FR sampler for more information If you have a 3700 Compact 1 12 and 24 bottles are the only valid choices as the 4 bottle option is not available Display 48 The 3700 Standard can be programmed for continuous sampling which means that they will sample into successive sets of bottles until the last set of bottles has been sampled into and then return to the first set of bottles and continue sampling indefi nitely into successive sets Continuous sampling is available for all multiple bottle configurations M Note The sampler will deposit samples indefi
267. splay similar to the 3 16 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines illustration below appears It communicates the sampler s status DONE the number of samples taken which will vary according to the program and the current time and date Input Displays You can easily identify input displays because they contain a blinking word or number The blinking word or number serves as a prompt for input and is said to be selected When the input displays shown below first appear the word PROGRAM and the sample volume entry 250 will be blinking Italic characters are used to represent blinking words or numbers in illustrations in this manual Display Numbers Nearly all input displays have a number assigned to them The number is used to cross reference the input displays with an explanatory listing found in Appendix D If you have a question about a given input display you can easily locate the description of the display To access the display number press the stop key when viewing the input display To see the display number press the stop key read the number from the display then look up the corre sponding number in Appendix D Displays With Choices There are two types of input displays displays that prompt you to make a choice between time paced and flow paced sampling for example and displays that prompt for numeric input sample volume for example In displays that ask yo
268. sumes 3 92 Storm Sampling 2 0 00 0 ae dt he ois a aa Hoi 3 95 Program Started Later Than Programmed Start Time 3 99 Program Started Later Than Programmed 1st Switch Time 3 100 Program Started Later Than Programmed Stop Time 3 100 Reviewing the Sampling Results 3 103 Run State Displays Time Paced Sampling 3 107 Run State Displays Flow Paced Sampling 3 108 Run State Displays Composite Sampling 3 109 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction 1 1 Introduction 1 1 1 3700 Standard Description The 3700 Standard Portable Sampler is a programmable liquid sampler and is one of Teledyne Isco s 3700 Series of portable and refrigerated samplers The extensive sampling capabilities easy flexible programming and durable construction make the 3700 Series ideally suited for general purpose or priority pollutant sampling The 3700 samplers also provide storm paced sampling capabilities designed to meet the EPA requirements for storm water runoff monitoring The 3700 Compact is a smaller version of the 3700 Standard It has the same sampling capabilities flexible programming and rugged construction of the larger 3700s but is lightweight A new feature of the 3700 Compact is a
269. sures that the calibration procedure includes the pump cycle used while running the sampling program Example Calibration e interactive state 3 37 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Calibration Continued Other program sequence displays 4 8 The sampler returns to standby Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 3 9 Configure Sequence The configure sequence provides a number of setup options Some options enable sampling features some provide reference data and others affect run state operations Example Checking the Configure Option Settings shows the pro cedure used to access the configure sequence When you see a SELECT OPTION lt display you are in the configure sequence Each option uses at least two displays The first display lists the option name The second and any additional dis plays are input displays To access an input display press the ENTER PROGRAM key while the desired option name is displayed Once you ve accessed the input display use the keypad to enter numbers and make choices Pressing the EXIT PROGRAM key in the configure option list will return the sampler to standby Pressing the EXIT PROGRAM key in a configure option input display will return you to the list of con figure options without changing the display s setting By pressing the LEFT ARRO
270. t reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date Example Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Intervals 1 Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 3 Select TIME 4 Select NONUNIFORM Example Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Intervals shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at non uniform time intervals This example assumes the sampler is configured for extended programming and that it connected to a Liquid Level Actuator The actuator will inhibit the sampler until the liquid level rises to contact the actuator probe The sampler is to take 24 samples the first samples are to occur at 10 minute intervals for an hour the next samples at 20 minute intervals for an hour and the remaining samples at 30 minute intervals One 500 ml sample is to be placed in each bottle Although this example assumes that nonuniform times are being used with the actuator uniform time intervals or flow intervals can be used with the actuator as well Select YES to modify the sequence of nonuniform time entries Enter the total number of samples 24 This entry should always include the sample taken at the start time 3 89 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 11 Select SAMPLES 12 Enter 1 to se
271. t the number of sampl 14 Select NO 16 To start the sampling routine with th This display appears while the Actuator i and the current time on the right 3 90 Example Time Paced Samples at Nonuniform Intervals Continued Enter the number of samples to occur at the first interval The sampler is to take samples at 10 minute intervals for an hour or 6 samples in the first hour Since the first sample is taken at the start time the remaining five When you have completed the first entries the display will roll to move the first interval entries to the first line and add the second line entries for the next series of samples and intervals Enter the next entries 3 samples 7 samples will occur at the 10 minute interval 8 at 20 minutes 9 Enter the third set of samples and in es per bottle to 1 After this message is displayed briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state 15 Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program e first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here s inhibiting the sampler The second line indicates the current time and date This display appears when the sampler becomes enabled and counts down the time
272. take a sample at key times in a flow paced sampling program There are two settings The first setting directs the sampler to take a sample at the start time The second directs the sampler to take a sample at the switch times when the bottle set changes are based on time Both settings of the option are disregarded in STORM sampling routines Display 40 Sample at Start Time If you select YES the 3700 will take the first sample at the start time entered in the program sequence If you select NO the first sample is delayed until the number of flow pulses set in the program sequence has counted down to zero Display 270 Sample at Time Switch If you select YES the sampler will switch to a new bottle or set take a sample and reset the flow pulse count The next sample will occur after a full pulse countdown If you select NO no samples be taken at the switch time and the pulse countdown will not be reset The switch will 3 9 10 Nonuniform Time 3 9 11 Calibrate Sampler 3 9 12 Sampling Stop Resume 3 9 13 Start Time Delay 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines occur in the middle of a pulse countdown and the first sample will be deposited in the new bottle or set when the countdown is completed Display 271 The Nonuniform Time option specifies the method by which non uniform intervals are to be entered in the extended program sequence Display s 26 or 27 If you select
273. tarts the sampling routine If the level of the stream falls below the set point the flow meter can disable the sampler and halt the routine 1 5 2 Non Isco Flow Meters 1 5 3 Samplink for Sampling Data Retrieval 3700 Portable Samplers Section 1 Introduction Certain flow meters when equipped with a rain gauge monitor rainfall You can program the flow meter to enable the sampler when the measured amount of rainfall reaches a predetermined set point You can select set points or pairs of set points pairs can be level and rainfall rates level and elapsed time rainfall and elapsed time and so on from the sampler enable control con dition A control condition is simply the set of parameters defining the conditions in which a flow meter will enable the sampler For example the user can program a flow meter with a control condition which is satisfied when the flow meter detects 1 4 inch of rainfall in 15 minutes Although you can enter level control conditions directly at the flow meter s front panel you must download most control conditions to the flow meter from an IBM compatible computer running Teledyne Isco s Flowlink software In addition to enable control conditions Teledyne Isco s 4200 Series Flow Meters 2100 Series Flow Modules and 4100 Series Flow Loggers provide an internal memory module When pro grammed with the Flowlink software the flow meters store level or flow rate readings rainfall measurements and sa
274. tended mode Sample Volumes section is identical to the Sample Volumes basic Sample Volume section 3 10 4 Extended Mode Key The extended mode Key Times section has two additional sets of Times displays which allow you to specify the time of the first bottle or bottle set change and to set up the sampling stop and resume times First Switch Time The first switch time displays will appear only when you have specified bottle or bottle set changes based on time in the Sample Distribution section If you select TIME rather than SAMPLES in the CHANGE SETS BASED ON TIME SAMPLES display you first will be asked if you want to enter a setting for the first switch time If you respond YES you will be prompted for the time of the first bottle or set change The first time switch displays are indicated by Display s 95 46 and 47 in Figure 3 11 The first switch time setting allows you to control the times of each bottle switch without delaying the routine and thereby missing samples For example if you have programmed the sampler for time switches every hour and you want the switches to occur on the hour you can set the time of the first switch at the next even hour start the sampling routine early and deposit samples in the first bottle set until the first switch time At the first switch time the distributor moves to the next bottle set The first bottle set may not be completely filled however by starting the routine
275. ter Rarely from rock strata Hydrogen HCN Faint odor of bit 0 93 Slight symp 10 6 0 40 0 Near top Insecti Detector tube Cyanide ter almonds toms appear cide and Colorless gas upon exposure rodenti to 0 002 to cide 0 004 0 3 rapidly fatal C 7 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix C General Safety Procedures Table C 1 Hazardous Gases Continued Specific Explosive Likely i f Gravity 3 max WHEY EELS Range by Location Most Simpiesnand Chemical Common Physiological Safe 60 8 Hour paar Cheapest Formula Properties Grete Effect Min Exposure Exposure volam alr Gu common Safe Method Density ppm ppm Limits Highest Sources of Testing Air 1 lower upper Concentration Gas Chemical Common Specific Physiological Max Max Explosive Range Likely Most Simplest and Formula Properties Gravity or Effect Safe Safe by vol Location Common Cheapest apor 60 Min 8 Hour lin air of Sources Safe Method Density Exposure Exposure Limits Highest lof Testing Air 1 ppm ppm lower upper Concentration Hydro HS Irritant and poi 1 19 Impairs sense 200 20 43 Near bottom Coal gas 1 HS gen Sul sonous volatile of smell rap to but may be petro Ampoule fide compound Rot idly as concen 300 45 0 above bottom if leum ten egg odor in tration airisheated and sewer gas 2 5 by weight small concentra increases highly humid Fumes lead acetate tions Exposure Death in f
276. teractive State Structure 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Table 3 1 Configure Option Functions Configure Option Programming Mode Function Set Clock Basic amp Extended Sets the sampler s real time clock Bottles and Sizes Basic amp Extended Sets the sampler for Portable or Compact configuration Sets the number and size of bottles used in the tub or inner sleeve Suction Line Basic amp Extended Sets the type of line vinyl or TEFLON line diameter 1 4 or 3 s inch and line length 3 to 99 feet Liquid Detector Basic amp Extended Enables disables liquid detector sets the number of rinse cycles 0 to 3 enables disables the suction head entry and sets the number of sampling retries 0 to 3 Programming Mode Basic amp Extended Sets the programming mode basic or extended Calibrate Sampler Sampling Stop Resume Basic amp Extended Extended Load Stored Extended Loads one of as many as three previously saved sampling pro Program grams Save Current Extended Saves current sampling program Program Flow Mode Extended Directs sampler to take a sample at the beginning of a flow paced d program Directs sampler to sample at time switches Sampling Nonuniform Time Extended Directs sampler to accept nonuniform intervals as specific clock times or in minutes Enables disables the calibration sequence Enables disables Sampl
277. the liquid level of the flow stream rises to contact the actuator s probe With nonuniform time intervals the sampler can collect samples frequently when the flow rate is highest and less frequently as the flow rate decreases You can also use nonuniform times to simulate flow paced sam pling When the flow rate varies predictably using nonuniform time intervals allows you to take samples at equal flow volumes As the flow rate increases you can take samples at equal flow volumes by decreasing the time interval As the flow rate decreases you can increase the time interval When you use nonuniform times the time interval between each sample event is programmable You can enter nonuniform times in two ways in minutes or in clock times The first method minutes allows you to enter the number of sample events spaced at intervals defined in minutes 12 samples at 5 minute intervals six samples at 10 minute intervals four samples at 15 minute intervals and so on You can also enter a specific clock time and date for each sample event sample event 1 at 6 00 on April 20 sample event 2 at 6 30 on April 20 sample event 3 at 7 15 on April 20 You can specify as many as 999 sample events spaced in nonuniform minutes or as many as 99 events as clock times If a routine requires a large number of nonuniform times you can save the routine with the program storage feature so that you do not have to reenter the nonuniform times You can use
278. the purge the display indicates the number of the bottle that will receive the sample volume m As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears This message remains through the post sample purge This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample event is completed It indicates the number of the bottle that is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The left side of the second line displays the scheduled time for the next event The current time is displayed on the right side The cycle of displays shown in Steps 12 through 13 is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done 4 4 When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date Example Flow Paced Sequential Sampling shows how to program the sampler to take flow paced samples at intervals of 5 pulses One 500 ml sample is to be placed in each bottle The sampling program will default to the value entered in Start Time Delay option 3 27 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Flow Paced Sequential Sampling Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state 1 2 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM 3 Select FLOW h
279. the routine to perform bottles per sample or samples per bottle multiplexing Select NO if you want the routine to perform sequential sampling Display 35 This display appears when you have selected YES in Display 35 Select BOTTLES PER SAMPLE if you want the sampler to perform bottles per sample multiplexing Select SAMPLES PER BOTTLE if you want the sampler to per form samples per bottle multiplexing Display 36 This display appears only in the extended programming mode when you have set the number of bottles per sample event to 1 in Display 30 Select TIME if you want the bottles to be switched after a specified period of time Select SAMPLES if you want the bottles to be switched after a specified number of samples have been placed in a bottle We recommend using SAMPLES for time paced sampling routines Display 40 This display appears when the number of bottles per sample event is set to a number greater than one and less than half the number of bottles in the tub Select TIME to switch bottle sets after a specified period of time Select SAM PLES BTL to switch bottle sets after a specified number of samples have been placed in a set of bottles Teledyne Isco recommends using SAMPLES BTL for time paced sampling routines Display 41 D 3 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix D Display Index Table D 1 Display Index Continue
280. the sampler will inform you with the message illustrated below The sampler will initiate one sample event if it missed one or more sample events Example Program Started Later Than Programmed Start Time This display informs you of the expired start time The sampler presents this display for a short time then advances to the next display This display reports the number of samples that will be skipped if you do not change the start time it appears only if more than one sample event time has passed 1 Select YES if you want to change the start time Select NO if missed samples are acceptable Display 142 2 This display appears when you select YES in display 142 and a sample event is to occur at the start time Enter the new start time Display 93 3 This display appears when you select YES in display 142 and no sample is to occur at the start time for a flow paced sampling routine Enter the new start time Display 9 3 99 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines to the next display Example Program Started Later Than Programmed 1st Switch Time This display informs you of the expired switch time The sampler presents this display for a short time then advances Select YES to change the switch time Select NO to continue the routi This display appears when you select YES in display 14
281. tices Section 7 Precautions for Safe Handling and Use Leak Procedures Steps to be Taken if Material Sweep or vacuum up and place the spilled material in a waste disposal container Avoid raising dust Is Spilled Or Released Waste Disposal Dispose in an approved landfill according to federal state and local regulations Methods Precautions to be Cover promptly to avoid blowing dust Wash after handling Taken In Handling and Storage Other Precautions and or Special Keep in sealed containers away from moisture The silica gel will readily adsorb moisture Hazards Optional Indicating Silica Gel G 7 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix G Material Safety Data Sheets G 8 3700 Portable Samplers Index A Accessories B 1 Assembly 2 1 B Base Section Bottles 2 2 Compact 2 1 Standard 2 1 Basic Programming 3 21 Examples 3 18 Bottles 1 7 2 2 3 38 Volume Settings 3 39 C Calibrate Sampler 3 47 Circuit Boards 6 9 Main Board 6 9 Pump Control Board 6 12 Cleaning 5 1 Protocols for Priority Pollutants 5 1 Compact Sampler 1 2 Compatible Equipment 4 3 4 20 mA Input 4 5 Flow Meters 1 8 4 3 Liquid Level Actuator 1 10 4 5 Master Slave Cables 1 10 4 6 Samplink 1 9 Composite Sampling 4 1 Configure Options 3 11 Configure Sequence 3 12 3 38 Bottles and Sizes 3 38 Calibrate Sampler 3 47 Enable Pin 3 48 Event Mark 3 50 Flow Mode Sampling 3 46 Liquid Detector 3 41
282. time delay of 1 the sampler would begin the routine at the beginning of the next minute Thus if you pressed start sampling at 10 32 15 the sampler would initiate the sample event at 10 33 00 The sampler would begin time and flow intervals at 10 33 00 If you enter a start time delay of 2 the sampler would begin time or flow intervals at 10 34 00 Display 310 If you enter a start time the sampler will disregard the start time delay The sampler will use the start time delay setting when you do not enter the start time in the program sequence When using a start time delay of greater than 0 take care when the sampler is being inhibited by another sampler a flow meter or a Liquid Level Actuator The Enable Pin option allows you to program the sampler s response to a device controlling pin F of the flow meter connector for example a 4200 Series Flow Meter a 4100 Series Flow Logger or the 1640 Liquid Level Actuator There are four Enable Pin setup options Sample Upon Disable Sample Upon Enable Reset Sample Interval and Inhibit Countdown The sampler dis regards the Enable Pin configure option settings when running a storm routine Each of these options is discussed below Master Slave Operation The first input display MASTER SLAVE MODE is used to enable or disable the master slave feature Enabling the master slave feature allows you to connect two samplers in a master slave relationship Using samplers in master sla
283. ting PROGRAM Select FLOW Enter 1000 to set the pulse interval to 1000 pulses Enter 2 to set the bottles per samp Select TIME Select NO Select YES Enter the time at which you want the sampler to move to the second bottle set At the first bottle set change 12 00 the bottle set changes will be le event to 2 Each bottle set will con sist of two bottles placed on schedule After this message is displayed briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state 13 When the sampler has been correctl y installed press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 3 87 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Flow Paced Sampling Time Based Bottle Sets Continued 14 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here This display appears after you press the START SAMPLING key to start the routine The scheduled start time is reported on the first line The second line reports the current time and date This display alternates with the display illustrated below The first line indicates the sample event number and the bottle numbers of the
284. to begin with the section entitled Programming Introduction on page 3 8 This section introduces the specifics of programming the sampler e Description of Sampling Operations contains a description of the sampling cycle as well as the opera tions e The Types of Samples section discusses sample types that can be taken in both basic and extended mode with the 3700 Sampler e The Programming Introduction section discusses the sampler s program structure and introduces both basic and extended programming modes e The Operating States section discusses the sampler s three operating states e Introduction to the Programming Procedures describes the basic programming mode e The sections Using the Keypad to Respond to Displays Keypad Description and Displays discuss programming the sampler with the keypad e Basic Programming provides examples for the basic programming mode e The Configure Sequence section discusses how to tailor the sampler to your specific application e The Extended Programming Mode section discusses the mode and presents programming examples e Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure discusses adjusting the sampler for a foreign language and or metric units e The Standby State section discusses your options when the sampler is in standby 3 1 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 1 Description of Sampling Operation 3 1 1 Sample Events and the Sampling Cycle
285. to download the desired condition The 4100 Series Flow Loggers must be pro grammed with Flowlink NOTE You can program the sampler to start the routine at an exact time and date with a start time entry You do not need to use a flow meter to enable the sampler 2 Program and install the sampler Programming the sampler includes adjusting certain con figuration option settings as well as entering the STORM program settings Table 3 7 lists the configure options and their recommended STORM settings 3 Connect the flow meter to the sampler with the connect cable 4 Turn the flow meter on Turn the sampler on and start the sampling routine by pressing the start sampling key Connect the flow meter to the sampler and start the flow 3 68 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines meter before you press the start sampling key on the sam pler If you are using the flow meter to detect a storm event and enable the sampler when the event occurs the sampler must be disabled by the flow meter when you press the start sampling key If the sampler is not disabled it will begin the routine as soon as you press the key This means that the flow meter must not detect the enable control con ditions The flow meter will disable a sampler only when the conditions are not satisfied Terminating the Routine A storm routine will terminate under the following conditions e The sampler completes the routine e A flow meter disa
286. to see that the crystal oscillator is operating and at proper frequency 9 Examine the reset circuitry to be sure that it is working properly 10 Check lithium battery for 3 VDC output when main power is removed The following is a general description of the 3700 Sampler elec tronic circuitry While reading this description refer to the pic torial views of the circuit boards Figures 6 6 and 6 7 The 3700 Sampler is a microprocessor based device that executes a software program stored in ROM The program is a series of instructions that tell the microprocessor what to do in order to accomplish the various functions that the sampler must perform In the following discussion of the hardware the software is dis cussed only as is necessary to describe the operation of the cir cuitry The A 12 VDC connector on the side of the control box is used to connect to an external 12 V source 8 75 Amp PTC device provides circuit protection The 3700 Sampler contains two printed circuit boards the main board Figure 6 6 and the pump control board Figure 6 7 The display module attached to the main circuit board also contains a small circuit board This module is fully assembled when pur chased It does not contain any user serviceable parts Unless the display module is being replaced do not disturb it P4 supplies power to the circuitry pin 1 is ground and pin 2 is 12 volts A 5 volt switching regulator IC U11 obtains a 5 volt rail
287. to set the number of bottles per sample event to 1 8 Select SAMPLES 9 Enter 1 to set the number of samples per bottle to 1 10 Enter 500 to set the sample volume at 500 ml 11 Select YES 12 Enter the start time and date 8 00 tomorrow morning After this message displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state 13 When the sampler is properly installed press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 14 To start the sampling routine with th e first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here This display appears as the sampler counts down the time remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the left and the current time on the right When start time occurs the sampler will purge the display indicates the bottle nu take the first sample Which will beg mber which receives the sample volume ins with a pre sample purge During the As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears and remains through the post sample purge 3 81 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Ti
288. top time occurred or the routine was completed See Example Sampling with Stops and Resumes Enable Disable Select ENABLE to add the stops and resume settings to the program sequence Display 300 Sample at Stop The Sample at Stop setting directs the sampler to take a sample at stop times Display 301 Sample at Resume The Sample at Resume setting directs the sampler to take a sample at resume times Display 302 The Start Time Delay option sets the amount of time in minutes between the time you press the start sampling key and the time the sampling routine is initiated The sampler s response varies according to specific entries 0 1 and entries greater than 1 Display 310 3 47 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines 3 9 14 Enable Pin 3 48 An entry of 0 eliminates the delay to start time the start time occurs the moment you press start sampling For example if you press start sampling at 10 32 15 the sampler will initiate a time paced sample event at 10 32 15 The sampler will start clocking time intervals at the beginning of the minute HH MM 00 of the first sample event If a sampling routine required 10 minute intervals and you pressed start sam pling at 10 32 15 the sampler would begin the time interval at 10 32 00 It would initiate the second sample event at 10 42 00 The sampler would begin the flow interval at 10 32 15 for flow paced routines If you entered a start
289. tops and glass which are good insulators A metal surface is best a wood surface 6 7 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing Contact Technical Service 6 3 Preliminary 6 8 Electronics Troubleshooting is acceptable Conductive grounding mats are available for workstations and are worthwhile if you have a consider able amount of repair to do The degree of hazard depends on the relative humidity Be particularly careful if the work area is extremely dry or if the work is being done in the winter when indoor forced heating and outdoor low temperatures cause the relative humidity level to be very low Keep yourself grounded when handling disassembled equipment When you arrive at the work area after a unit has been opened for repair make an effort to always touch the metal chassis before touching any of the circuit compo nents Be especially careful handling the CMOS integrated cir cuits when removing them from the rest of the circuitry Being connected to the rest of the circuitry provides some protection Most of the circuitry is well protected from damage caused by static discharge when the unit is pow ered up However an IC should never be replaced when the unit is on Individual CMOS semiconductors and built up printed cir cuit boards should always be transported in conductive packaging Foil is satisfactory metallic plastic bags are also available and work well If you purchase replacement
290. u press the START SAMPLING key at 10 05 30 the routine will begin the 1 minute countdown at 10 05 00 and start the routine at 10 06 00 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines When the sampler is operating under factory configuration settings and running a time paced program the 3700 will take the first sample at the start time for time paced sam pling This is true whether you enter a specific start time and date or if you use the start time delay For flow paced sampling however the flow pulse count down will begin at the start time and the first sample will be taken when the countdown reaches zero Refer to the discussion on the Flow Mode option in the Nonuniform Time section for additional information 6 The sampler automatically returns to standby 7 From standby start the routine by pressing the start sam pling key This places the sampler into the run state If you to start the routine after the programmed start time the sampler will allow you to reprogram the start time 8 Use the run state displays to monitor the sampler s prog ress Before programming the sampler Especially if you are unfamiliar with the settings used in the previous routine or if the settings have been changed verify the configure option set tings You must change the settings if they do not match your bottle size or the suction line used with your unit Entries sug gested in this example configure the sampler for 24 1000
291. u to make a choice you must select one of as many as four alternatives placed in brackets The display above prompts you to select the program or configure sequence The choices PROGRAM and CONFIGURE appear in brackets When the display illustrated above appears the word PROGRAM will be blinking If PROGRAM is acceptable press the ENTER PROGRAM key If PROGRAM is not acceptable press the left arrow or right arrow key until CONFIGURE is blinking Then press the ENTER PROGRAM key The ENTER PROGRAM key directs the sampler to advance to the next step Numeric Input Displays A numeric input display prompts you for input by blinking the currently stored number In the display illustrated above the number 250 will blink to prompt you to enter a value If the blinking number is acceptable you do not need to type the number again pressing the enter program key will store the number and advance the program to the next step To enter a new number press the appropriate numeric keys then press the ENTER PROGRAM key 3 17 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines The sampler will not accept a number that exceeds the allowable range of values placed in parentheses on the display In the next illustration you cannot enter a value less than 10 ml or greater than 990 ml as a sample volume If an entered number exceeds the range the sampler will emit a series of beeps and the origina
292. ubing where samples for organics are to be col lected Teledyne Isco Pump Tube 1 Rinse by pumping hot tap water through tubing for at least 2 minutes 2 Acid wash tubing by pumping at least a 20 solution of hydrochloric acid through tubing for at least 2 minutes 3 Rinse by pumping hot tap water through tubing for at least 2 minutes 4 Rinse by pumping distilled water through tubing for at least 2 minutes PTFE Tubing 1 Rinse twice with spectro grade acetone 2 Rinse thoroughly with hot tap water using a brush if possi ble to remove particulate matter and surface film Rinse thoroughly three times with tap water Acid wash with at least 20 percent hydrochloric acid Rinse thoroughly three times with tap water Rinse thoroughly three times with distilled water 9 eh rd Rinse thoroughly with petroleum ether and dry by pulling room air through tubing co Dry overnight in warm oven less than 150 F if possible 9 Cap ends with aluminum foil 5 3 Pump Tubing 5 3 1 Inspection of Pump Tubing 3700 Portable Samplers Section 5 Routine Maintenance The pump tube serves two functions it is a pump tube in the per istaltic pump and a distribution tube routing the sample liquid from the pump outlet to the sample bottle The pump tube consists of a single 42 inch 103 8 cm piece of medical grade Silastic silicone rubber tubing Teledyne Isco uses medical grade tubing because of its superior mechanical
293. uctions From standby you can start or resume a sampling program access the program or configure sequences take manual samples and use the display status key to review program set tings or the results of a sampling routine A sampler in standby uses a number of displays to communicate its status Some of these displays are associated with the function of a specific key other displays are used to notify you that a sampling program is done halted or has encountered a problem The standby state displays and valid keys are discussed in the following sections Standby Display When you first turn the sampler on the sampler wakes up in the standby state The standby display shown here simply informs you that the sampler is in standby and reports the current time and date At this point the following keys are operable ON OFF PUMP REVERSE PUMP FORWARD START SAMPLING ENTER PROGRAM MANUAL SAMPLE NEXT BOTTLE and DISPLAY STATUS Program Halted A sampling program can be halted with either the STOP or EXIT PROGRAM key if this occurs the sampler will display the halt message shown below If you halt the program to take a manual sample or to change a setting in the program or configure sequence the sampler will return to standby If this is the case you will not be able to use the RESUME SAMPLING key Keypad operations valid in Standby state are discussed below For additional keypad descriptions see Keypad Descripti
294. uid Detector 240 Select ENABLE Rinses 241 0 3 69 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Table 3 7 Recommended Configurations for Storm Sampling Continued Configure Option Display Number Recommended Setting Enter head manually 242 NO of retries 243 0 Programming Mode 250 Select EXTENDED Load Stored Program 255 Load only a stored STORM program Save Current Program 260 Not applicable Flow Mode Sampling Sample at start time 270 Disregarded by STORM routines Sample at switch times 271 Disregarded by STORM routines Nonuniform Time 280 Disregarded by STORM routines Calibrate Sampler 290 Select DISABLE Sampling Stop resume 300 Sample at stop times 301 Disregarded by STORM routines Sample at resume times 302 Disregarded by STORM routines Start Time Delay 310 Enable Pin Sample upon disable 321 Disregarded by STORM routines Sample upon enable 322 Disregarded by STORM routines Reset sample interval 323 Disregarded by STORM routines Inhibit countdown 324 Disregarded by STORM routines Event Mark Continuous pulse 330 Select preferred Event Mark Pump cycle fwd only 331 Select preferred Event Mark Purge Counts Pre sample counts 340 Enter preferred count Post sample counts 341 Enter preferred count Tubing Life Reset pump counter 351 Reset if required pump counts 352 Enter prefe
295. ulk 100 42 het fia nh cu tse Re aceite archer beats Se ID vinyl tubing bulk 500 oy ae Cc ade ne Al els sen AN Ld 14 Vinyl suction line accessory kit 8 Vinyl suction line accessory kit 8 Standard Weighted Polypropylene Strainer 1 4 Stainless steel low flow strainer ONLY Etes 22 hhc BREE eo tet Gea eee bee 38 Stainless steel low flow strainer ODI awit tl hr Le RS Ete eet Res hosel 3 3 Weighted strainer only all CPVC coated 1 4 Stainless steel suction line COUPE Ms 25 2 ee Se che has Steak ehh ela nn me 38 Stainless steel suction line couplers secede MR Se sl Mek he A in Extra Silastic pump tubing bulk 10 length Extra Silastic pump tubing bulk 50 length 68 2100 002 68 2100 003 68 2100 007 68 2100 001 291 0011 00 291 0011 01 291 0011 02 291 0011 03 60 9004 351 68 2910 003 68 6700 147 68 6700 112 68 6700 087 68 6700 113 68 6700 114 68 6700 096 60 9003 475 60 9004 378 60 9004 379 60 1683 146 60 2703 114 60 1680 055 60 1680 056 60 1680 057 60 1680 058 60 1680 059 68 3700 006 68 3700 007 60 9004 367 69 2903 139 69 2903 138 60 3704 066 69 4703 154 69 4703 106 68 6700 046 68 6700 047 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix B Accessories B 4 Power Sources
296. ultiplexing 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ZA SS SS 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 Sample Event Number Figure 3 2 Samples Per Bottle Multiplexing Bottles Per Sample Multiplexing In bottles per sample multiplexing you fill a programmed number of bottles at each sample event The programmed number of bottles is a bottle set as many as 24 bottles can be used Bottles per sample multi plexing is useful when you need a sample that exceeds the capacity of your bottles It is also useful when you need sets of identical samples for example when using more than one pre servative When you use bottles per sample multiplexing you modify the normal sampling cycle relocate distributor pre sample purge sample delivery post sample purge by delaying the complete post sample purge until sample volumes have been delivered to each bottle of the set Instead the pump reverses until the pump tubing is purged just beyond the liquid detector When the purged liquid passes the detector the distributor moves to the next bottle and the pump begins pumping forward to deliver the next sample This repeats until each bottle of the set is filled A full post sample purge is completed at the end of the sample event The sampler then pauses until the next sample event occurs at which time the cycle repeats for the
297. urn the instrument to Teledyne Isco and Teledyne Isco will pay surface transportation to return the repaired instrument to the customer Teledyne Isco will not pay air freight or customer s packing and crating charges This warranty does not cover loss damage or defects resulting from transportation between the customer s facility and the repair facility The warranty for any instrument is the one in effect on date of shipment The warranty period begins on the shipping date unless Teledyne Isco agrees in writing to a different date Excluded from this warranty are normal wear expendable items such as charts ribbon lamps tubing and glassware fittings and wetted parts of valves and damage due to corrosion misuse accident or lack of proper maintenance This warranty does not cover products not sold under the Teledyne Isco trademark or for which any other warranty is specifically stated No item may be returned for warranty service without a return authorization number issued by Teledyne Isco This warranty is expressly in lieu of all other warranties and obligations and Teledyne Isco specifically disclaims any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose The warrantor is Teledyne Isco 4700 Superior Lincoln NE 68504 U S A This warranty applies to the USA and countries where Teledyne Isco does not have an authorized dealer Customers in countries outside the USA where Teledyne Isco has an authorized
298. ve Program 3 45 Stored Programs 3 44 Programming Mode 3 42 Pump Tubing 1 6 5 3 Installation 5 7 Removal 5 4 Replacement Alert 3 52 Replacement Parts A 1 Review Program 3 102 Run State 3 106 sS Safety C 1 Sample Delivery 1 6 Sampler ID 3 52 Samples Cooling 2 2 Recovery 2 7 Sampling Cycle 3 2 Distribution 3 3 Event Cycle 6 13 Event Mark 3 50 Events 3 2 Flow Mode 3 46 Initiation 3 104 Intervals 1 3 Master Slave 1 5 3 48 4 6 Multiplex 1 3 Nonuniform Time 3 47 Pacing 3 3 Programming 3 42 Start Times 1 5 Stop Resume 3 47 STORM 1 4 3 7 3 67 Volume Delivery 6 13 Volumes 1 5 Samplink 1 9 Servicing CMOS Circuitry 6 7 Controller 6 1 Distributor Gear Case 6 5 Electronics Troubleshooting 6 8 Pump Gear Case 6 6 Sample Volume Delivery 6 13 Specifications 1 10 Standard Sampler 1 1 Standby State 3 97 Operable Keys 3 97 Start Time Delay 3 47 Start Times 1 5 3 62 Stormwater Sampling 3 7 3 67 Checklists 3 67 Configurations 3 69 Programming 3 71 Strainers 1 7 2 4 Intake Placement 2 5 Suction Line 1 6 2 2 3 40 5 8 Teflon 2 4 5 8 Vinyl 2 3 5 8 T Technical Specifications 1 10 FRP S S SNRITRN EMR E Name and amount of Hazardous Substances or Elements in the product FA EMULE EF Hazardous Substances or Elements Component Name ft IK 4M TMB Z RIKA BURA Pb Hg Cd Cr VD PBB
299. ve pairs allows you to conduct continuous sampling one sampler can perform a sampling routine while the other sampler awaits servicing The samplers must be connected with the Master Slave Interconnect cable This cable is attached to the flow meter connector on both samplers While the master sampler is performing its sampling routine it sends an inhibit signal out on pin D The slave sampler receives the signal on pin F and remains dormant until the master sampler completes its routine At this point the samplers reverse roles 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines When installing the master slave pair you must press the START SAMPLING key on both machines to place both machines in the run state The first machine started becomes the master After the master completes its routine it can be serviced and started again The master slave cycle will halt if both samplers have fin ished their routines and have not been serviced and restarted The samplers cannot reverse roles unless both are in the run state Display 320 Sample Upon Disable When you are using a flow meter or Liquid Level Actuator SAMPLE UPON DISABLE allows you to direct the sampler to take a sample as soon as you disable the sampler through pin F A response of YES causes the sampler to take a sample when the pin is disabled a response of NO prevents the sampler from taking a sample Display 321 The sampler determines an e
300. volume here Display 82 This display is part of the calibration sequence and appears if the measured volume and the programmed volume dif fer by a factor of two or more Select YES to confirm the number entered in Display 82 Select NO to return to Display 82 Display 83 Select YES to enter a start time NO will begin the sampling routine according to the delay set in Display 310 90 This display appears when you have selected YES in Display 90 Enter the start time and date for the first sample event This display will also appear if you have initiated the routine after a programmed start time so that you can reprogram the start time Display 91 This display appears when you have selected YES in Display 90 Enter the start time and date for the flow pulse countdown This display will also appear if you have initiated the routine after a programmed start time so that you can reprogram the start time Display 92 This display is the last display of the storm branch It appears when you select YES in Display 90 Enter the start time for the storm sampling routine The sampler will disregard enable or disable signals from the flow meter until the start time you enter here Display 93 This display appears when you have selected TIME in either Display 40 or 41 Select YES if you want to specify a clock time
301. volumes At four samples per hour the 12 hour period would yield 48 samples The total sample volume collected at the end of the routine would be 12 000 ml 48 samples x 250 ml sample well within the capacity of the 4 gallon bottle interactive state Example Time Paced Composite Sampling 1 If the sampler is not already on press the ON OFF key to turn it on Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the 2 Access the configure sequence by selecting CONFIGURE configure option appears 3 Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to scroll through the configure options until the Bottles and Sizes 7 Enter the bottle size here 15 000 e Isco bottle sizes 3 34 8 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key at this display to access the Suction Line input displays 3700 Portable Samplers Section 3 Programming Guidelines Example Time Paced Composite Sampling Continued 9 Select 1 4 if you are using 4 inch suction line 4s if you are using 8 inch suction line This display appears when you have selected 3e in step 9 Select VINYL if you are using vinyl suction line TEFLON if you are using TEFLON suction line 10 Enter the length of the suction line The length should not include the tube coupling or the strainer 11 12 13 14 15 16 With 18 19 20 To verify the
302. volutions as the suction line fills At liquid detection the controller uses that count to determine the number of pump revolutions required to deliver the programmed sample volume 6 13 3700 Portable Samplers Section 6 Servicing 6 14 6 4 3 Sample Volume Variation Be sure to note that the volume delivered by a peristaltic pump can be influenced by a number of factors other than those dis cussed above Thus even with the sophistication of the sample volume measuring functions of the 3700 the volume of sample deposited in the sample bottle may vary from the pro grammed value The repeatability of a sample volume from sample to sample which normally is the most important consid eration is typically within the 10 ml specification 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists The following appendix contains illustrated replacement parts listings including part descriptions and order numbers Replacement parts can be purchased by contacting Teledyne Isco s Customer Service Department Teledyne Isco Inc Customer Service Department P O Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 USA Phone 800 228 4373 402 464 0231 FAX 402 465 3022 E mail IscoInfo teledyne com A 1 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists A 1 Standard Portable 3700 60 3703 26 REV H A 2 3700 Portable Samplers Appendix A Replacement Parts Lists
303. w Flow CPVC 4 feet 1 2 m 4 feet 1 2 m 2 6 Connection to Power The 3700 Series must use one of four 12 VDC power sources an Source Isco AC Power Pack an Isco Nickel Cadmium Battery Pack an Isco sealed lead acid battery or an external 12V direct current source such as an automotive or marine battery For complete information on these power options and how to maintain them refer to the Power Products Guide that was shipped with your sampler 2 5 3700 Portable Samplers Section 2 Setup Procedures 2 7 Placement of the Sampler into Operation Place your sampler on a relatively flat surface Placing it on a steep incline may cause the sample to miss the bottle opening Figure 2 5 Placement of the Sampler Adjacent to Manhole 2 6 M Note Although the suction line can extend to a liquid source as many as 99 feet from the sampler note that the maximum lift for the peristaltic pump with either the PTFE or vinyl line is 26 feet When installing the sampler be sure the head the vertical dis tance between the level of the liquid source and the pump is no greater than 26 feet The pump will not be able to deliver samples for heads of 26 feet or greater If it is necessary to enter the manhole to position the strainer and suction line observe standard safety precautions Refer to Appendix C for a discussion of safety considerations The sampler will automatically cease operation after all bottles have be
304. was taken at the start time Press ENTER PROGRAM to advance to the next display 7 This display reports the initiation time of the sample and the number of pump counts to liquid detection in the sample delivery cycle These values indicate changes in the sampling conditions head changes for example Press ENTER PROGRAM to advance to the next display 8 Press ENTER PROGRAM to continue to review the information for the remaining sample events 9 Press ENTER PROGRAM to return to the REVIEW PROGRAM display 10 Select NO to return to standby 3 17 4 Source of Sample The display illustrated in step 6 of Example Reviewing the Sam Event pling Results shows the sample event number the bottle s used and the source of the sample event Source refers to the pro grammed or configured setting that initiated the sample event For example the sampler will report TIME as a source if the sample was taken as one of the program s time paced samples Nine sources are tracked and reported Time The sample event was one of the program s time paced samples Flow The sample event was one of the program s flow paced samples Start The sample event was initiated at the program s start time Resume The sample event was initiated to compensate for a missed sample which should have occurred while the sampler was halted If more than one sample event was
305. xed bottles or bottle sets after a programmed number of samples have been deposited or after a programmed period of time Both methods can be used with either time paced or flow paced rou tines By specifying the number of samples to be deposited you can control the volume of each bottle precisely By specifying that the sets be switched after specific time periods you can control the time frame for a series of sample volumes This is especially useful for flow paced sampling Although the flow rate may vary each bottle or bottle set represents a fixed time period The 3700 Series storm capabilities are ideal for monitoring storm water runoff The sampler allows you to divide the bottles into two groups The first group of bottles is normally reserved for a first flush grab sample The second bottle group receives the flow weighted composite samples You can distribute samples in either group sequentially or in any of the three types of multi plexing Three bottle configurations are available for STORM sampling with the 3700 Standard are the 24 bottle configuration with either 1 000 or 350 ml bottles a 12 bottle configuration con taining 1 quart 950 ml glass bottles and a 4 bottle configu ration with 1 gallon 3 800 ml glass bottles With the 3700 Compact 24 bottle sets have a capacity of 500 ml and 12 bottle sets have a 300 ml capacity STORM sampling takes full advantage of the sampler enable programming available through the Teledy
306. xt configure option When you are done configuring the sampler press EXIT PROGRAM to return to Standby After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPLING key to run the program 3 9 8 Save Current Program The Save Current Program option allows you to assign a dif ferent number to as many as three sampling routines and save those numbers This option eliminates the need to reprogram the sampler for recurrent routines Only the program settings are saved if dif ferent routines require different configurations you must recon figure the sampler for each routine For example if the sampler is used at two sites each requiring a specific sampling routine and different suction line lengths the sampling routines can be stored for each site but you must reenter the suction line length settings each time the line changes Display 260 The sampler is shipped from the factory with four programs the current program and three stored programs numbered from 1 to 3 All four programs contain the factory default program settings Saving a program will replace the default program with the current settings Reinitialization of the sampler restores the default program settings shown in Tables 3 4 and 3 5 M Note Saving a program will overwrite a program saved earlier under the same number You can view settings for the current program with the Display Status procedure Example Save Current Pro gram s
307. y 10 when you have selected TIME Select UNIFORM for uniform time intervals NONUNIFORM for nonuniform time intervals Display11 This display appears after you select PROGRAM in Display 1 It appears only when the sampler is configured for the extended programming mode and for 4 12 or 24 bottles with the 3700 Portable and 12 or 24 bottles with the 3700 Compact Select TIME for time paced sampling Select FLOW for flow paced sampling and STORM for storm sampling Display 12 This display appears after you select STORM in Display 12 Use to select time or flow pacing for the second bottle group of a storm routine Select TIME for time pacing or FLOW for flow pacing Display14 This display appears after you select STORM in Display 12 Enter the amount of time between the sampler s enabling and the first sample event for the first bottle group occurs Display 15 This display is the first input display of the flow segment of a storm program Select DURING to collect samples for the first and second bottle groups concurrently Select AFTER to collect samples for the second bottle group after the sampler has filled the first bottle group Display 16 This display appears after you select STORM in Display 12 Enter the amount of time between the time the sam pler is enabled and the first sam
308. y to transport If you do not need to return the entire 3700 Standard sampler to the lab you can exchange the full base section for an empty one by separating the base from the center section and installing an empty tub After the full base has been removed place caps on the bottles Using the base section as a carrying case is conve nient prevents undue warming of cooled samples and helps to prevent mix ups in bottle order An optional cover with carrying handles for the base section is available to aid in transportation Attach the cover to the base in the same manner as the center section It is good practice to attach an adhesive label detailing the location time date etc of sampling to avoid confusion When exchanging bottle tubs it is also good practice to check the charge of the sampler s battery If the sampler s battery is ques tionable exchange it with a freshly charged battery With the 3700 Compact there is no need to change bases Slide the sleeve out to remove the bottles for transporting off site Place caps on the bottles and you may want to attach an adhesive label with relevant details on the sleeve as noted above After you have installed the base section with empty bottles in the standard or replaced the full bottles in the sleeve with empty ones in the compact start the sampler again by pressing the start sampling key You may need to reprogram the start time if one has been entered To prevent tamp
309. ystal Display and the keypad Cross contamination Cross contamination occurs when por tions of previous samples are mixed with the current sample For example cross contamination results when residual amounts of sample remain in the suction line or pump tube from a previous sample event Event mark An event mark is a signal that the sampler sends to a flow meter or other device a each sample event Each time the flow meter receives an event mark pulse the flow meter places a mark on the its recording chart Marking the recording chart cross references the charted flow with the sample events Multiplex sampling There are two types of multiplexing samples per bottle and bottles per sample In samples per bottle multiplexing a bottle receives samples from more than one sample event In bottles per sample multiplexing equal sample volumes are placed in more than one bottle at each sample event Post sample purge Post sample purge refers to the suction line purge that follows the delivery of the sample volume s It is also called post purge Pre sample purge Pre sample purge refers to the suction line purge that precedes the delivery of the sample volume s It is also called pre purge Real time clock A real time clock can be set to the actual time and date Sample event A sample event consists of the complete sam pling cycle resulting in the collection and distribution of one or more equal sample volumes A samp

3700 Portable Sampler User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents